0 With the pervasiveness of technologies nowadays, a
St. Louis Review Center, Inc. learner-centered instruction can be promoted. Which of
Eneelsus Bldg. Gen. Luna St., Davao City
Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 or 222-8732
ED-TECH
POST TEST
Which of the following statements is correct about the
domains of educational technology?
Design is the production stage while development is the
planning stage.
Both the design and development are the planning stage,
Evaluation is synonymous with implementation.
Utilization is the action phase.
Ms. Cruz was hired in a well-equipped school but she has to
start preparing her instructional materials before classes
begin. Which of the following is a systematic process in
preparing her materials?
design utilization evaluation - development
design development utilization evaluation 1 Which of these technologies are arranged from the most
development design utilization evaluation
development utilization evaluation design
Ms. Briones is planning to integrate technology in her
Mathematics class. Which of the following would be her
second step?
set the objectives
analyze the learners
utilize the materials with showmanship
evaluate the performance of the students
Which of the following should Ms. Gomez primarily consider
in determining her teaching and learning objectives and
use of instructional media?
A. the learner C. the instructional activity
B. the teacher D. the instructional strategy
Which is the best reason why teachers state the objectives
before using instructional media?
To be able to practice how to operate the equipment.
To determine which media to use best.
To prepare the materials beforehand.
To secure available materials.
Ms. Villegas is thinking of an educational technology that can
relay information clearly to her class. Which principle
will guide her in the selection of the
material? A. interest C. cost effectiveness
B. meaningfulness D. communication effectiveness
Mrs. Zinampan presented real samples of rocks when she
discussed the different forms of rocks. What principle in
the selection of instructional material did she apply?
A. interest C. cost effective
B. B authenticity D. responsiveness
0 Which of the following is a limitation of conventional
technologies in teaching and learning?
0.0 They pose problems on storage..
0.1 They are less abstract and more concrete.
0.2 They are readily available in the environment,
around school, and in the home.
0.3 They provide hands-on learning experiences and
emphasize real-world
0.4 applications
1 which of the following is not a contribution of technology
to the learning process? .
1.0 The quality of learning can be improved
1.1 The delivery of instructions can be more interesting
1.2 The role of the teacher can be changed into a
demonstrator.
1.3 The method of teaching and learning becomes more
interactive
2 In what way can instructional aids foster learning?
2.0 Reinforce learning
2.1 Entertain students
2.2 Take the place of the teacher
2.3 Holds students in the classroom
the following statements support this approach to
teaching?
I. It focuses on transformation of facts.
II. It supports the use of lecture and drill methods.
III. It gives emphasis on collaboration and authentic
assessment.
IV. Students work on tasks determined and controlled by
the teacher.
A. I and II only C. II and IV only
B. I and III only D. III and IV only
0 Prof. Villamins students use cooperative learning, inquiry
based and project-based learning approaches in creating
their digital unit plans. What can be developed among
the learners through these approaches?
0 repetition and active learning
1 repetition & information delivery
2 information processing and active learning
3 construction of knowledge and information exchange
symbolic to multisensory?
0 real objects, print, audio-visual materials, and visual
materials
1 visual materials, audio visual materials, print and
computers
2 visual materials, print, audio-visual materials and
realia
3 print, audio, visual materials, and computers
2 Which group of technologies has the highest degree of
abstraction?
0 book, imaginative literature, programmed instruction
1 digital video, film, versatile compact disc
2 video, pictures and television
3 realia and computer
3 Mrs. Soriano, a Grade V teacher prefers to use textbooks
than other instructional materials. What could be her
reason for using it?
0 Textbooks can be easily duplicated.
1 Textbooks quickly become updated.
2 Textbooks address the needs of diverse students.
3 Textbooks contain most of the materials they need to
learn in the course.
4 It is impractical to bring real objects to the classroom so
Ms. Simangan constructed a threedimensional visual
instead. Which of the following did she construct?
A. cartoon C. graphic
B. chart D. model
0 If a teacher wants to teach her pupils the skill to organize
and integrate related concepts, which of the following is
the most appropriate graphic organizer to use?
A. timeline C. venn diagram
B. fishbone D. semantic webbing
0 Which graphic organizer is used to show how a series of
events interact to produce a set of results again and
again?
A. Series of events chart C. cycle
B. Web D. timeline
19. Which instructional aid requires pupils to verbalize?
A. graphic C. . model
B. diorama D. . video
0 Which of the following is inappropriate in using printed
visuals such as charts, graphs, and drawings?
0.0 Provide written or verbal cues to highlight important
aspects of visuals.
0.1 Allow the students to pass the materials from one
person to another.
0.2 Use materials that everyone can see.
0.3 Present the material one at time.
1 Under what category will a globe as an instructional
material fall?
A. Realia C. solid model
B. mock up D. cutaway model
22. Prof. Agustin would like to provide hands-on experience 34. Ms. Villanueva wants to teach the students the
on the expansion and contraction of matter. Which of the performance of a certain skill such as dancing. Which
following materials would be the best to use? technology would be the most appropriate and
A. models C. realias convenient to use?
B. pictures D. slides A. film C. television
Ms. Sarah finds the chalkboard an effective instructional B. video D. printed material
material up to present. However, just like any other 0 Slides are miniature transparencies. They can be created
materials, it also has its limitations. Which one is it? with simple cameras and simple equipment. They display
It allows spontaneity, speed and change. color in a realistic manner. However, they also have some
Absent students cannot keep up with their assignments. limitations. Which one is it?
It is valuable for emphasizing the major points of the 0 They can be easily updated and revised.
lesson. 1 They can be adapted to group or to individual use.
It can be used for displaying pictures and important 2 They can get out of sequence if handled individually.
clippings. 3 They can be combined with taped narration for
With which learning style group are manipulatives MOST greater effectiveness.
effective? 1 Mrs. Santos used a film clip in teaching science concepts
Master style group to her Grade Six class. However, she found out that it was
Interpersonal style group inefficiently used in the classroom. When is a technology
Understanding style group considered inefficient?
Self- expressive style group 0 When it makes viewing more interesting.
Which does a pupil use when s/he sings a concept to a 1 When it increases the time to master the lesson.
familiar tune in order to help himself commit the concept 2 When it helps attain the objectives of the lesson.
to memory? 3 When it enhances understanding of new lesson.
A. rap C. pop 2 Prof. Manantans lesson in EPP is about Pagtatanim ng
B. jingle D. lullaby halaman to her students. How can she make her lesson
0 Prof. Arcilla would like to use audiocassette tape in more interesting and meaningful?
teaching a lesson in English. In which activity is 0 Have a viewing activity about the lesson.
audiocassette tape very effective in the teaching-learning 1 Have them read their EPP book.
process? 2 Give them a collaborative work.
0 in developing listening skills 3 Let them listen to a gardener.
1 in teaching creative writing 3 Prof. Delos Santos would like her students to give more
2 in composing poems accurate observations about plants in the environment.
3 in building concepts Which technique would help her attain her objective?
1 Romalyn is going to discuss about The ADDIE Model to a 0 Bring them to the garden.
big class. She is planning to use a technology by which 1 Bring actual plants to class.
parts of her presentation could be partly hidden to make 2 Show colorful pictures to the class.
it more exciting and interesting. What do you think shall 3 Let the class read books about the topic.
she use? 4 Which of the following should be avoided in presenting
A. model C. transparency visuals?
B. realia D. video 0 Show visuals with an element of suspense.
5888 Marife wants to make a presentation material 1 Shut off the overhead projector when explaining
wherein more additional transparent sheets with lengthily.
information can be placed over a base transparency. 2 Present all the materials simultaneously to hold the
Which one should learners interest.
she make? 3 Erase any writing on the chalkboard or whiteboard
A. cut-out C. silhouette when you no longer need it.
B. puppet D. overlay 5 After listing down the advantages and disadvantages of
29. Which one is used with 2D and 3D materials? computers, Mrs. Muoz decided to purchase a computer
A. Opaque projector C. digital projector for her class. Which do you think is the last consideration
B. overhead projector D. slide projector in purchasing the equipment?
After watching the film, Muro Ami, the students of Mrs. 0 Computers can make her more efficient.
Tamaray are expected to show a demonstrative proof of 1 Computers can be a form of entertainment.
what they have learned. How is the technology used in 2 Computers can enhance teaching and learning.
thissituation? 3 Computers can be used for interactive presentations.
A. entertainment C. instructional 6 Marnel prepares his school research works using
0 informational D. entertainment and informational computer to submit his requirements on time. Does the
23 Self made charts and illustrations serve as universal aid computer make him productive and efficient? Why?
for bringing fascinating and exciting experiences in the 0 Yes, because it can generate its own data.
classroom. To tap the optimum potentials of these II. Yes, because it can make ones work easier.
materials, which of the following should be avoided? III. Yes, because it can perform tasks fast and accurately.
23 Giving due consideration to lettering. A. I and II C. II and III
24 Presenting materials with accurate facts. B. I and III D. I, II and III
25 Giving more importance to austerity over legibility. 0Prof. Aguinaldo would like to integrate technology in writing
26 Focusing on the main idea of the lesson presented. a friendly letter. How can he do it effectively?
24 Kamyl used overhead transparencies when she presented 23 Let the pupils surf a friendly letter from the Internet.
her assigned topic to class. What type of educational 24 Have the pupils write a friendly letter and send it
technology are transparencies? through an email.
A. printed material C. projected material 25 Have the pupils forward a downloaded friendly letter
B. graphic material D. non-projected material to others via email.
23 Which instructional material/s is/are MOST fit in 26 Let the pupils write a friendly letter using word
contextualized learning? processing and have it critiqued by
A. TV C. pictures 27 their peers.
B. Slides D. field trip 1Which of the following is known for its strength of giving
immediate feedback?
A. video C. digital encyclopedia
B. story book D. computer-assisted instruction
 44. Which of the following computer-based instructional
material can be used to learn new concepts?
A. games C. simulation
B. tutorial D. drill and practice
45. 45. Prof. Natividad would like to create a presentation
material for his lesson on the types of computer-assisted
Instruction. Which tool should he use?
A. communicative tool C. productivity tool
B. Informative tool D. situating tool
23 Prof. De Guzman uses an online learning approach by
which content provides links to information at other
locations and serves as a focal point for a distance
education experience. Which of the following does he
use?
23 computer-aided instruction
24 web-based instruction
25 self-paced program
26 teleconferencing
24 Mr. Villena searches for related literature by accessing
several databases in the library computer that is
connected with other computers that have databases.
How is this termed?
A. CD ROM search C. mechanical search
B. computer search D. online search
23 Which pair of tools provide synchronous communication?
23 chatroom and email
24 email and bulletin board
25 video conferencing and blogs
26 instant messaging and chatroom
24 Should Mrs. Reyes allow her pupils to surf the Internet in
creating a group newsletter during her English class?
Why?
23 No, because pupils may just be exchanging messages
via email.
24 No, because the pupils might open undesirable
websites.
25 Yes, to allow the pupils to chat with their friends.
26 Yes, as long as it is used effectively.
25 Which of the following should you ask yourself in
evaluating the content of an instructional material?
23 Do the materials reinforce learning effectively?
24 Are the materials of high technical quality?
25 Does the content match the curriculum?
26 Is it appropriate for the students?
26 Which of the following statements does NOT describe
educational technology?
i. It includes hardware and software.
ii. It refers to the efficiency of teachers in using
computers
iii. It is the development, application, and evaluation of
systems, techniques and aids to improve human learning.
A. i only C. Both ii and iii
B. ii only D. Both i and iii
4 What should Mr. Asuncion determine first in the selection
of media in teaching?
23 needs of the students C. technique to be used
24 availability of the media D. objectives of the lesson
5 Which is the most important reason why teachers
preview materials to be used in class?
23 To gain confidence in using them.
24 To encourage viewers to be more focused.
25 To avoid potential problems that might occur while
materials are in use.
26 To ensure appropriateness of the materials with the
objectives and target audience.
6 After Ms. Raca planned her lesson in English, she found
out that the materials at hand do not match her
objectives. Which is the best thing that she can do?
23 Modify the available materials.
24 Teach the lesson the following day.
25 Change the objectives to match with the available
materials.
26 Carry out the lesson as planned and use the
materials at hand.
55. Prof. Balagtas used worksheets, manipulatives and
models in teaching math to help her students understand
the lesson and love the subject. What did she bear in
mind when she used these materials?
A. appropriateness C. breadth
B. balance D. variety
4 Ms. Torres always makes sure that text, animation and
color do not confuse students in her presentation
materials. Which principle is applied?
A. simplicity C. responsiveness
B. variety D. cost effectiveness
57. Mrs. Reyes, a librarian, informed the students as well as
the teachers that several software are available for
classroom instruction and individual learning. Which
material is she referring to?
A. Computers C. Television set
B. CD-ROM D. VCD and DVD players
23 Susans mother tongue is a vernacular. Which of the
following materials would be the most efficient and
effective material to learn a second language?
23 interactive multimedia
24 pictures and print materials
25 audio compact discs and radio
26 printed materials and real objects
24 Computer can be a good tool for individualized
instruction. Which of the following aspects can be a
deterrent for its full utilization in the classrooms?
A. economic C. social
B. physical D. technical
60. With the increasing use of educational technology inside
the classroom, what roles are expected of the teacher?
A. facilitator C. knowledge giver
B. demonstrator D. source of information
23 Which of the following technologies are properly
classified?
23 computers, compact discs, film, television
24 imaginative literature, book, programmed instruction
25 versatile compact disc, printed material, diagram,
sketches
26 digital video, phonograph, compact discs, radio,
audio tape
24 Which of the following technologies are arranged from
the most concrete to the most abstract?
23 motion pictures, verbal symbols, visual symbols,
radio, realias
24 realias, visual symbols, television, motion pictures,
still pictures
25 realias, motion pictures, still pictures, visual symbols,
verbal symbols
26 verbal symbols, still pictures, visual symbols, models,
motion pictures
25 Which is the best way to present instructional materials?
23 concrete ->semi-concrete-> abstract->semi-abstract
24 semi-concrete-> concrete -> abstract-> semi-abstract
25 abstract->semi-abstract-> semi-concrete-> concrete
26 concrete ->semi-concrete-> semi-abstract -> abstract
26 Which of the following technologies provide iconic
experiences?
23 videos and computer
24 books and periodicals
25 audio and audio materials
26 printed and verbal symbols
27 How can Prof. Ubia best promote the use of multimedia
in teaching Science to her coteachers?
23 Sell multimedia at low cost.
24 Demonstrate its use to them.
25 Explain the literature supporting its use.
26 Convince the principal to require the use of
technology.
5888 There are countless things in the environment that 23 There are several reasons why teachers are reluctant in
you and your students can use to learn from such as using electronic media in the teaching-learning process.
trees, globes, pebbles, blocks etc. These real objects and Which is the most common reason?
models are really effective if they are utilized properly. 23 The difficulty in integrating them in the curriculum.
Which of the following is incorrect about the use of real 24 The limited exposure of teachers to new equipment.
objects and models? 25 Their incompatibility to diverse needs of the
5888 Familiarize yourself with the object or learners.
model. 26 The excessive availability of local technology in the
5889 Allow passing of a single object around the community.
class. 24 With the number of senses to be stimulated as criterion,
5890 Make sure that objects/models are large which one should be first in thelist?
enough to be seen by the whole class. 23 multi sensory aid C. visual aid
5891 Encourage students participation through B. audio-visual aid D. audio aid
questioning and having students 23 Which of the following is considered in terms of technical
5892 decide the next step. quality of a material?
5889 Aaron constructed a three dimensional material to A. stereotyping C. color and size of text
simulate the circulation of blood. Which of the following B. vocabulary level D. students achievement
did he construct? 1024 W
A. A solid model C. mock-up model hich statement is true about the opaque projector and
B. cutaway model D. cross-sectional model overhead projector?
23 Which is a two-dimensional representation of the earths An opaque projector allows more flexibility than an
geographic and/or political features? overhead projector.
A. globe C. mock-up An overhead projector allows more flexibility than an
B. map D. model opaque projector.
69. You asked your students to illustrate what they have Opaque and overhead projectors can instantaneously
understood from what they have read. Which of the project 3D visuals well.
following non-projected visuals are you referring to? The series of still visuals in an opaque projector are
A. printed visuals C. models arranged in a fixed pattern but not in an overhead
B. graphics D. realias projector.
23 Which software should Dr. Balagtas to manipulate 1025 A
numerical data in the computer? grade II teacher wanted to show the parts of a seed by
A. Spreadsheet C. word processing using a large, wooden seed visual aid with detachable
B. desktop publishing D. multimedia cotyledons and tiny seed. Under what classification does
5888 Prof. Silva uses projected visuals such as OHP in wooden structure fall?
presenting her lesson. What could be her main reason in A. assembly model C. realia
using such an educational technology? B. cutaway model D. solid model
5888 The materials are readily available. 0 Which term refers to a model which is constructed so as
5889 Most visuals can be obtained at no cost. to emphasize a particular part or function?
5890 It is more abstract than any other visuals. A. audio recording C. mock-up
5891 She can easily prepare her own B. simulation D, realia
transparencies in advance. 0 Which is the best use of computers to students like you?
5889 Ms. Pacheco showed a segment of matter in sine 0.0 They are used for chatting and surfing the net.
skwela to her pupils without a follow-up activity. Thus, 0.1 They are used for research and collaboration.
the pupils got low in the test. What does this imply? 0.2 They are used for playing online games.
5888 TV makes viewing enjoyable. 0.3 They are used for watching movies.
5889 TV promotes mastery of the lesson. 1 Which statement makes technology ineffective in student
5890 TV induces alienation on the part of the learning?
learners. 1.0 It develops higher thinking skills.
5891 TV is effective when learners attain the 1.1 It prepares students for the workforce.
lesson objectives. 1.2 It enhances students collaborative skills.
5890 Which activity is closest to the real thing? 1.3 It decreases achievement in content learning.
A. hear C. watch a demonstration 2 You plan to use instructional materials to a big class-size.
B. view images D. perform in a presentation Which of these will you not use?
23 Your department would like to purchase a computer set A. pictures C. 27-inch television
as your project. Which of the following advantages of B. projection device D. computer with LCD projector
computer will be your last consideration in purchasing it? 0 Computers can be classified according to the roles they
23 It can enhance the teaching and learning process. play namely communicative tool, informative tool, and
24 It can be used for interactive presentation. constructive tool. What is the other role of computes in
25 It can be used for research activity the options below?
26 It can be used for entertainment. A. instructional tool C. utility tool
24 Prof. Orencia will have a digitized presentation to pre- B. situating tool D, application tool
service teachers. Which of the following will make her 5888 Which of the following categories of CAI will you use
presentation appealing and effective? in your class if your objective is to increase proficiency in
23 Observe maximum use of animations and graphics a newly learned skill or refresh an existing one?
together. A. tutorial C. simulation
24 Apply as many computer effects per slide as possible. B. drill and practice . D. Instructional game
25 Reinforce textual information with graphic 512 Which of the following is an ineffective use of
organizers. presentation software?
26 Use as many color as possible. 512.0 Darken the room
25 Why are computers increasingly becoming pervasive in 512.1 Use appropriate pacing
schools nowadays? 512.2 Read directly from the slides.
23 Schools advocate the use of computers. 512.3 Allow interaction with the learner.
24 They increase efficiency and productivity. 513 Which of the following is NOT an example of
25 Anybody can operate computers without formal communicative tool?
training. 513.0 multimedia encyclopedia
26 Students have access to computers in school and at 513.1 teleconferencing
home. 513.2 electronic mail
513.3 chat
0 Which is a characteristic of the teaching machines of B. F. 0 P
Skinner? resent problems which are relevant to learning
0.0 It does not need any feedback. objectives.
0.1 It requires teachers assistance. 1 A
0.2 It is meant for a collaborative work. llow learners to select different content materials.
0.3 It allows a student to learn at his/her own pace. 2 P
1 Why is one-way delivery of information a misuse of rovide a cooperative learning atmosphere.
communication tools? 3 P
1.0 because the teacher expects the student to study rovide a scoring system.
more
1.1 because it requires activities that focus on thinking
than responding *****THEEND*****
1.2 because it enables the users to focus more on higher
level cognitive activities POST TEST
1.3 because this kind of practice lessens interaction ED-TECH
capabilities of communication tools 0 Which of the following statements is correct about the
2 Internet consists of thousands of connected computer domains of educational technology?
networks around the world. Which term does NOT refer
to Internet? 1. D 51. B
A. A. NET C. Cyberspace 2. B 52 A
B. B. Online D. Information Superhighway 3 A 53 D
Your class adviser is planning to have an asynchronous 4 A 54 A
communication with your classmates. Which technology 5 B 55 D
tools can she use? 6 D 56 A
0 chat and blog 7 B 57 B
1 chat and instant messaging 8 A 58 A
2 blog and video conferencing 9 C 59 A
3 electronic bulletin board and email 10 A 60 A
In your computer subject, you allow your class to chat as a 11 B 61 B
part of your motivation before discussing them the 12 D 62 C
roles of computer. How is chat used in this context? 13 D 63 D
A. Communicative tool C. Application tool 14 A 64 A
B. Informative tool D. Situating tool 15 D 65 B
0 Your mother wanted to finish her long dreamed course 16 D 66 B
but she wanted to do it at home during her free time. 17 D 67 C
How could you help your mother in pursuing her dream?
18 C 68 B
Encourage her to hire a helper so that she can attend 19 A 69 B
regularly to her class.
20 B 70 A
Give up your study so that your mother can attend her
classes. 21 C 71 D
Enroll her to the school where you enrolled. 22 C 72 D
Enroll her in distance education 23 B 73 D
24 C 74 D
1 The following statements are true about computer
conferencing. Which is an exception? 25 B 75 C
It refers to live student interaction with an expert. 26 A 76 B
It is also known as discussion forum or bulletin board. 27 C 77 B
28 D 78 A
It also refers to online class discussions, forums or
debates 29 A 79 C
It permits two or more individuals to engage in 30 C 80 A
asynchronous text-based dialogue. 31 C 81 A
2 Which instructional tool application will you introduce to 32 C 82 C
your class if your objective is to help them find and use 33 D 83 B
information resources available in the internet? 34 B 84 D
A. Webquests C. Scavenger Hunt 35 C 85 A
B. Hybrid course D. Distance education 36 B 86 B
0 Maryjane is looking for an organized instructional 37 C 87 B
program in which the teacher and learners can be 38 A 88 C
physically separated. Which of the following will she 39 C 89 A
choose? 40 B 90 D
0 Distance Education 41 C 91 D
1 Uniform Resource Locator 42 D 92 B
2 Web Quests 43 D 93 D
3 Computer-Based Instruction 44 B 94 A
1 Prof. Ruscoe would like to show Rizals museum to the 45 C 95 D
students but due to financial constraint, she couldnt 46 B 96 A
bring them there. What should she do to make the 47 D 97 C
teachinglearning process more realistic? 48 D 98 A
0 Conduct a virtual tour. 49 D 99 A
1 Use DVD with less resolution. 50 B 100 B
2 Show pictures of the museum to the whole class.
3 Go to the museum and relate all observations made.
2 Which of the following should you avoid if you were
asked to evaluate the effectiveness of an instructional
game after using it in teaching a lesson in high school
science?
 FILIPINO 24. Isang indihente ang tumawag ng aking pansin dahil sa
POST TEST nakakatawang ayos nito.
a. Maralita c. mag-asawa
I. Panuto: Bilugan ang titik ng wastong sagot. b. Matanda d. paslit
1. Agad na sumigaw ang bata ____ makitang dumating ang 5888 Naging Cum Laude si Memi dahil siya ay nagsunog ng
kanyang kapatid kilay gabi-gabi.
a. ng b. nang a. nagbubunot c. nag-aahit
2. Ang mga mag-aaral ay nagkasundo _____ sa iminungkahi b. puspos sa pag-aaral d. nag-aayuno
ng guro. 26. Parang balat-sibuyas ang kutis ng babaeng ito.
a. din b. rin a. namumula sa bilog c. mahaba at payat
0 Ang bawat tao _____ ay kailangang isakatuparan ang b. napakaputi at malinis d. pino at malambot
kanyang mithiin sa buhay. 0 Kapit-tuko sa isat-isa habang naglalakad ang
a. Daw b. raw 4. Ang kirot ay unti-unti magkasintahang Heart at Echo.
______ nawawala. 0 away nang away
a. ng b. nang 1 mahigpit na magkahawak-kamay
0 Ayon kay Jose Rizal, ang mga bata _____ ang siyang pag 2 malayo ang agwat
asa ng bansa. 3 patakbo
a. daw b. raw 1 Ang langitngit ng mga bintana ay gumigising nang lubos
6. Sa Sabado _____ gabi mawawalan ng kuryente. sa katahimikan ng silid-aralan.
a. ng b. nang a. Alatiit c. dekorasyon
7. Hindi na nakaramdam ng gutom si Kuya mula _____ siya b. kulay d. sira
ay natulog. 29. Mataginting na tinanggap ng batang paslit ang pangaral
a. ng b. nang ng guro.
8. _____ dalang pusa ang Inay nang umuwi. a. maingay c. mapayapa
a. May b. Mayroon b. pasigaw d. paismid
9. Maya-maya ay sisingaw _____ ang amoy ng Patay. 30. Ang paswit ay sa aso, ang Oo ay sa tao.
a. din b. rin a. Palo c. buto
10. Ang dunong ay kailangan ng tao ngunit kailangan _____ b. Sipol d. sigaw
niya ang tulong ng Maykapal.
a. din b. rin III. Ibinigay ang tamang sa mga tulang bayani
11. Sino ba ang sumisigaw _____ at nagtatakbuhan ang mga 31. Ang tawag sa mga tulang bayani
tao. a. dalit c. senakulo
a. doon b. roon b. epiko d. duplo
12. _____ tainga ang lupa, may pakpak ang balita. 32. Tinaguriang Joseng Batute ng Pilipinas
a. May b. Mayroon a. Jose Garcia Villa c. Jose Corazon de Jesus
b. Francisco Baltazar d. Modesto de Castro
0 Ang bawat tao sa mundo ___ ay dapat magkaunawaan
para sa kanilang ikabubuti. 33. Mga sagisag na ginamit ni Rizal
a. Daw b. raw a. Piping Dilat c. Pudpod at Plaridel
b. Dolores Manapat d. Dimasalang at laong laan
0 Ang Pilipinas ay malakas ____ tulad ng Singapore kung
karapatan ang Pag-uusapan. 0 Ang prinsipe ng makatang Tagalog
a. din b. rin 0 Modesto de Castro
1 Francisco Baltazar
15. Unti- unti ____ humuhupa ang kanyang galit. a. 2 Fernando bagong Lanta
Ng b. nang
3 Jose Garcia Villa
II. Ibinigay ang kahulugan ng salitang may salungguhit. 1 Siya ay tinaguriang Ama ng Balarila ng Wikang
Pambansa
5888 Narinig ko ang alawat ng mga bata sa silid ng mag- a. Jose Villa Panganiban c. Severino Reyes
asawang Maria at Jose.
b. Lope K. Santos d. Rafael Palma
a. ingay c. sigaw
b. mahinang alingawngaw d. tawanan 36. Isang dula noong panahon ng Hapon na isinulat ni
Francisco Soc Rodrigo
23 Ang Itay ay alimbuyaw nang dumating kanina.
a. Panibugho c. Panday Pira
a. Aburido c. Patakbo
b. Sa pula, Sa Puti d. Luha ng Buwaya
b. Masaya d. sumigaw
37. Ama ng Katipunan
18. Si Tj ay isang anluwagi nang mapangasawa ni Luisa.
a. Guro c. karpintero a. Emilio Jacinto c. Apolinario Mabini
b. katulong d. pulis b. Andres Bonifacio d. Marcelo H. del Pilar
19. Kakarampot ang nakuha kong ulam sa mesa. 38. Isang uri ng panitikan na nagsasaad ng simulain ng mga
a. marami c. malalaki bagay o tao sa daigdig
b. katiting d. mamhahaba a. tula c. alamat
b. tibag d. maikling kwento
20. Alumpihit ang Itay habang hinihintay ang Inay.
a. Kabang-kaba c. Di-mapalagay 0 Pinakabantog at pinakamahalagang awit na nasulat ni
b. Siyang- siya d. Tuwang-tuwa Francisco Baltazar
a. Senakulo c. duplo
21. Iyon ang kinamihasnan ng babaeng iyon sa bundok kaya
b. epiko d. Florante at Laura
di-makaunawa sa iyo.
a. natutuhan c. napag-aralan 40. Ang kauna-unahang Pilipinong manlilimbag
b. kinagawian d. nagustuhan a. Marcelo del Pilar c. Jose Maria Panganiban
b. Tomas Pinpin d. Emilio Aguinaldo
5888 Ang alipustahin ang mga dukha ay di kanais-nais na
pag-uugali. 41. Ang tawag sa ating unang alpabeto
a. layuan c. talikdan a. Alpabetong Romano c. Kartilya
b. apihin d. kagalitan b. Alibata d. Romanisasyon
5888 Ang taong may memorya fotograpica
23 Nakita kong pakimod na sumagot ang babae sa dalaga
nang mag-usap sila. 5888 Jose Maria Panganiban
a. Paismid c. patawa 5889 Jose Garcia Villa
b. Pangiti d. pasigaw 5890 Jose Corazon de Jesus
5891 Jose Rizal
43. Ama ng Dulang Pilipino b. kolisiyum d. coliseum
a. Julian Balmaceda c. Lope K. Santos
b. Severino Reyes d. Emilio Jacinto
44. Siya ay tinaguriang Joseng Sisiw
a. Jose Villa Panganiban c. Jose dela Cruz
b. Pedro Paterno d. Modesto de Castro
45. Ang kilalang epiko ng mga Muslim
a. Hudhud c. Hinalawod
b. Darangan d. Bantugan
46. Ang kauna-unahang aklat na nalimbag sa pilipinas
a. Pasyon c. Doctrina Christiana
b. Barlaan at Josaphat d. Florante at Laura
23 Ama ng Wikang Pambansa
a. Emilio Aguinaldo c. Aurelio Tolentino
b. Manuel L. Quezon d. Florante at Laura
48. Ang Orator ng Pagbabago
a. Graciano Lopez Jaena c. Urbana at Feliza
b. Mariano Ponce d. Jose Buhain
23 Isang dulang nagwagi ng kauna-unahang Gatimpalang
Palanca
a. Medusa c. Urbana at Feliza
b. Tibag d. Hulyo 4, 1946 A.D
5888 Ang may-akda ng Ang Cadaquilaan ng
Dios a. Emilio Aguinaldo c. Julian Felipe
b. Marcelo H. del Pilar d. Lopez Jaena
51. Baston ni Adan Hindi mabilang-bilang
a. buhok c. dahon
b. ulan d. palay
52. Ang dalawaY tatlo na,
Ang maitim ay maputi na
Ang bakod ay lagas na
a. aso c. matandang tao
b. kalabaw d. punong kahoy
53. Ang anak ay nakaupo na
Ang inay gumagapang pa
a. kalabasa c. sanggol
b. saging d. aso
54. Kung araw ay bumbong
Kung gabi ay dahon
a. saging c. atip ng bahay
b. banig d. paying
55. Isang reyna
Nakaupo sa tasa
a. kandila c. kasoy
b. kapa d. santol
56. Dalawang magkaibigan,
unahan nang unahan.
a. trak c. bibig
b. paa d. mata
57. Dalawang bolang sinulid
Umaabot hanggang langit
a. bola c. lobo
b. mata d. saranggola
58. May ulong walang mukha
May katawan, walang sikmura
Namamahay nang sadya
a. pako c. upo
b. palito ng posporo d. talong
59. Bumili ako ng alipin
Mataas pa sa akin
a. payong c. sombrero
b. atip d. bahay
60. Tubig sa ining-ining
Di mahipan ng hangin
a. ilog c. ulan
b. balon d. dagat
61.
a. eskursiyon c. exkursion
b. iskursiyon d. excursion
62.
a. scout c. iskawt
b. escout d. skawt
63.
a. colisiyon c. koliseum
64. 5891 Magkakaroon tayo ng lakas kung tayoy
a. Istadyum c. Estadyum magkakaisa.
b. Stadium d. estadium
65.
a. Matematika c. matimatika
b. Mathematica d. matemateka
Karamihan sa mga sugapa ay mula sa wasak na tahanan.
malaki ang sita ng bahay
maliit lamang ang bahay
magkahiwalay ang magulang
walng magulang
Matagal na lumagay sa tahimik si Marcia. Ang ibig sabihinay
_______.
a. matagal na namatay c. hindi na nagpakita
b. nag-asawa na d. nanganak na
0 Alin ang salawikain sa sumusunod:
0.0 Nasa Diyos ang awa
Nasa Tao ang gawa
0.1 Di-maliparang uwak
0.2 May puno walang bunga
May dahon walang sanga
0.3 Nag-bubuhat ng sariling bangko
1 Ang bagong alpabetong Filipino ay may ______ ng letra.
a. 20 b. 24 c. 28 d. 30
70. Ito ay bahagi ng aklat na makikita sa likod. Ito ay talaan ng
lahat na mahalagang paksa kasama ang pahina. Ang mga
paksa ay nakasulat sa paalpabeto.
a. Talatuntunan c. Talahulugan
b. Talatinigan d. Talaan ng nilalaman
0 Isang kuwento ng ang gumagapang ay mga hayop na
kumikilos at nagsasalita na parang tao.
a. Parabola c. kuwento
b. pabula d. alamat
0 Ito ay isang uri ng dula na nawawakas a pagkamatay ng
pangunahing tauhan.
a. komedya c. melodrama
b. epiko d. trahedya
73. Isang kuwento hango sa banal na kasulatan na umaakay
sa tao sa matuwid na landas ng buhay. Ito ay may aral.
a. Anekdota c. parabola
b. alamat d. sanaysay
74. Isang tagisan ng mga talino sa pamamagitan ng katwiran
sa pamamaraang patula.
a. balagtasan c. tula
b. talumpati d. duplo
75. Si severino Reyes na lalong kilala sa tawag na Lola
Basyang ay higit na kilala sa larangan ng:
a. dulaan c. pag-awit
b. pagtula d. balagtasan
0Ang Kumitang ay isang uri ng awiting bayan. Ito ay may
karaniwang inaawit sa:
a. paghaharana c. paghehele
b. pakikidigma d. pamamangka
5888 Ang senakulo ay isang panrelihiyon; ito ay naglalayon
na
5888 ipaala ang kapanganakan ni Hesukristo
5889 ipakita ang pagkakapatiran ng mga
Kristiyano at Muslim
5890 magsalarawan ngmga pinagdaanang buhay
at kamatayan ni Hesukristo
5891 magligtas sa mga kasalanan
5889 Sa akda niyang Guryon, ipinalintulad ni Idelfonso
Santos ang Guryon sa:
a. buhay ng tao c. anyo ng pagpapalipad
b. tibay ng pisi d. hanging habagat
23 Unupo si Itim, sinulot ni Pula, heto na si Puti na bubuga-
buga. Ito ay halimbawa ng isang:
a. bugtong c. alamat
b. salawikain d. kuwentong bayan
5888 Ang sinuman ay makabubuo ng matibay na lubid
kung pagsasamahin ang sinulid. Ang ibig sabihin ng
kasabihang ito ay:
5888 Mahirap magkaisa ang mga tao.
5889 Madali ang gumawa ng lubid kung may
sinulid
5890 Kailangan natin ang lubid sa ating mga
Gawain.
 23 Ang taong nagigipit sa patalm kumapit. Ano ang ibig 98. Kung ano ang Urbana at felisa sa mga tagalog ang
sabihin ng salawikaing ito: a. Lagda c. Bidasari
23 Ang kaligtasan ng taong nagigipit ay sa tapang ng b. Maragtas d. Hudhud
dibdib ay siya naman sa mga Bisaya.
24 Susuungin ng tao kahit ani mang panganib upang 99. Sa mga tauhan ng Noli Me Tangere ni Rizal, si
malunasan ang kanyang problema a. Basilio c. Capitan Tiago
25 Malapit sa panganib ang mga taong nagigipit. b. Elias d. Simon
26 Huwag makiharap sa taong nagigipit sapagkat siya ay Ang nagligtas kay Ibarra sa kapahamakan
siguradong galit 100. Ang aklat ng mga tinipong tula sa Tagalog ni Lope K.
24 Alin sa sumusunod ang hindi tuluyang anyo ng panitikan? Santos ay pinamagatang
a. korido c. kuwentong bayan a. Damdamin c. Tungkos ng Alaala
b. alamat d. maikling kuwento b. Puso at Diwa d. Mga Dahong Ginto
83. Tukuyin kung anong uri ng panitikan ang Isang bayabas,
pito ang butas. *****THEEND*****
a. Sawikain c. Salawikain
b. Idyoma d. Bugtong WORK HARD, DREAM HARDER
5888 Ano man ang tibay ng piling abaka ay wala ring lakas
kapag nag-iisa. Isinasasaad ng salawikaing ito ang
kahalagaan ng : filipino
5888 pagkakaisat pagtutulungan 1 B 51 B
5889 tibay ng dibdib at lakas kahit nag-iisa 2 B 52 C
5890 pagkakaroon ng lakas kahit nag-iisa 3 B 53 A
5891 pagpapalakas ng loob lalot nag-iisa 4 B 54 B
5889 Sa akin lipain doon nagmula 5 B 55 C
Lahat ng pagkain nitong ating bansa
6 A 56 B
Ang lahat ng tao mayaman o dukha
7 B 57 B
Silay umaasa sa pawis kot gawa.
Ano ang ipinahihiwatig ng saknong? 8 A 58 B
23 Lahat ng pagkain ay sa magsasaka nagmumula 9 B 59 C
24 Lahat ng magsasaka ay may lupang sinasaka 10 A 60 B
25 Lahat ng taot bagay ay galling sa lupa 11 A 61 B
26 Lahat ng umaasa sa biyayang galling sa magsasaka. 12 A 62 C
86. Ang kaibigan ko ay isa lamang maralita. 13 B 63 B
a. mangmang c. mabait 14 A 64 A
b. maliliit na tao d. mahirap 15 B 65 A
87. Si Nena ay inaruga ng kanyang lola mula pa noong siyay 16 B 66 C
maulila. 17 A 67 B
a. pinabayaan c. inalagaan 18 C 68 A
b. pinamigay d. kinuha 19 B 69 C
88. Palasak na ang desenyong iyan. 20 C 70 A
a. pambihira c. magastos 21 B 71 B
b. pangkaraniwan d. wala sa moda 22 B 72 D
89. Ang mga salbahe ay kinamuhian niya 23 A 73 C
a. kinakalinga c. kinatatakutan
24 A 74 A
b. kinukumusta d. kinasusuklaman
25 B 75 A
90. Ang mga kawal na lumabag sa utos ay binigyan ng
26 D 76 B
babala.
27 B 77 C
a. sundalo c. kusinero
b. kaibigan d. pulis 28 A 78 A
91. Nangangamba ka ba na hindi ka niya pagbibigyan? 29 C 79 A
a. nasisiyahan c. nababanas 30 B 80 D
b. natatakot d. naiinis 31 A 81 B
92. Ang pagpunta sa Saudi Arabia ay di-gawang biro. 32 C 82 A
a. Madali c. mahirap 33 D 83 D
b. masayang Gawain d. maayos 34 B 84 A
93. Si Miguel ay sumakabilang buhay na noong Linggo. 35 B 85 D
a. nagpaalam c. nagpunta sa siyudad 36 B 86 D
b. namatay d. nagbayad ng utang 37 B 87 C
94. Bakit mukhang Biyernes Santo si Marko. 38 C 88 B
a. malungkot c. mukhang masaya 39 D 89 D
b. lumuluha d. tumatawa 40 B 90 A
95. Nakaririmarim ang nangyaring sakuna sa dagat. 41 A 91 B
a. nakalulungkot c. nakaiinis 42 A 92 C
b. nakatatakot d. nakapangingilabot 43 B 93 B
0 Ang dayuhang siyang pinakamatalik na kaibigan ni Rizal 44 C 94 A
ay
45 B 95 D
a. Austin Craig c. Otley beyer
46 C 96 B
b. Ferdinand Blumentritt d. Don Eulogio Despujl
47 B 97 A
0 Dahil sa tulong at pagmamalasakit ni
0.0 Dona Aurora A. Quezon 48 A 98 D
0.1 Tandang Sora 49 D 99 D
0.2 Luz B. Magsaysay 50 B 100 B
Sa kapakanan ng mga sinalanta ng sakuna, siyay
tinaguriang Ina ng Kruz na Pula.
 HUMAN GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT 1 The reinforcement of a persons responses by
POST-TEST April 2010 presentation or removal of rewards and punishment.
0 O
Multiple Choices: perant conditioning c. Feedback Principle
b. Transfer of learning d. Discipline
0 The process by which certain potentials are inherited from
the parents for his development
a. Life c. Heredity
b. Birth d. Character
0This theory states that there are 8 basic development stages
that the individual has to pass through his life
23 Learning Theory
24 Psychoanalytic Theory
25 Psychosocial Theory
26 Cognitive Development
1Transition age from childhood to adulthood where rapid
physical changes and sex maturity occur resulting in
changes in ways of feelings, thinking and acting.
a. Puberty c. Early adulthood
b. Adolescence d. Stage V
5888 Modifying an existing scheme after an individuals
interaction with the environment, resulting in the
creation of a new scheme.
a. Assimilation c. Recognition
b. Interaction d. Accommodation
18688
Theory stating that a persons behavior can be
motivated by urges towards self satisfaction.
0 Psychoanalytic Theory
1 Cognitive development theory
2 Psychosocial Theory
3 Moral development theory
18689
The ability of a child to conceptualize the retention
and preservation of the same quantity under various
changes.
a. Recognition c. Assimilation
b. Reversibility d. Conservation
0 Refers to the idea that no individual are exactly the same
or alike.
0 Cognitive theory c. Individual differences
1 Exclusivity theory d. Emotional quotient
1 He is known as the Father of Modern I.Q. Test
a. Lewis Terman c. Laurence Kohlberg
b. Erick Erickson d. Martin Lesley
0 Intellectual appreciative Experience is
0 base on the premise that all learning has emotional
correlates
1 obtained in the field of music, art and literature
2 the acquisition and retention o acts and information
3 assumes that human activities are based on stimulus
and response
1 These statements imply that children at the early learning
stage consider parents and teachers as authorities and
models.
0 Parents and teachers should always coordinate
childrens activities
1 Parents should enforce strict discipline at home and
teachers in school
2 Parents and teachers should be the role models at all
times
3 Parents and teachers should always consult each
other with regards the childs intellectual
development
2 Any change in the behavior of an individual
a. Learning c. Change
b. Response d. Development
0 Which of the following principles IS NOT considered
under Classical Conditioning by Ivan Pavlov?
0 E
xcitation
1 A
dhesive Principle
2 S
timulus Generalization
3 N
one of the above
14. This stimulation of action best explains the behavior of
an individual to take what he perceives to be the shortest
route to his goals.
a. Recognition c. Response
b. Assimilation d. Motivation
15. The process by which an individual acquires the social
and cultural heritage o the society where he belongs.
a. Socialization c. Integration
b. Internalization d. Acquisition
0 Philosophy of educations main function.
23 Aid the leaner to build his own personal philosophy
24 Definition o goals and setting of directions from
which education
25 Educations carries on a lifetime cycle
26 Provision of academic background prerequisite to
learning
1 According to Froebel, kindergarten is also known as
____________?
23 children have fun and enjoyment
24 Garden where children could grow
25 He learning Center for Life
26 Where new beginnings begin
2 Which of the following statements is given emphasis by
humanistic education?
23 The great works of man such as the classics should
be enjoyed.
24 Man should learn the different philosophies of
education
25 Build a man who is distinctly civilized, educations
and refined
26 Develop man into a thinking individual
3 A teacher who advocates the pragmatic philosophy of
education believes that experience should follow
learning, thus, she has to?
23 require her student mastery of the lessons
24 encourage her students to memorize facts
25 equip her students with basic skills and abilities
26 provide her student with opportunities to apply their
skills and abilities
4 How are institutions of learning encouraged to set higher
standards over and above the minimum requirement for
state recognition?
23 Scholastic achievement
24 Faculty development
25 Academic freedom
26 Voluntary accreditation
5 The period of physical, especially sexual, and mental
maturation which is characterized by rapid somatic
growth is known as
a. infancy c. puberty
b. early childhood d. adulthood
22. Claustrophobia is an irrational fear of
a. Darkness c. closed space
b. strangers d. height
4 An eye defect characterized by clear vision in one
dimension but unfocused vision on the other is called
a. myopia c. hyperopia
b. astigmatism d. presbyopia
0 Which of the following statements does not apply to
adolescents?
5888 they desire the approval of their peers
5889 they seek dependence on their parents
5890 they have a marked sex development
5891 none of the above
1 As young people mature, society expects them to
develop competencies and assume social roles in a
conventional manner.
5888 expectation of parents
5889 influence of peers groups
5890 influence of formal education
5891 cultural demands
2 The founder of the theory of psychology called
psychoanalysis was
a. Lock c. Freud
b. Hume d. leibnitz
27. When the learner reaches a point where no further Hardship allowance is given to a teacher when
improvement can be expected, he is in a so-called hes assigned in a depressed area
a. development crisis c. regression hes given additional teaching load
23 learning plateau d. depression hes in lahar area
0 Regarding the sexual maturation o boys and girls, hes assigned in a hazardous area
teachers should bear in mind that: The ability for quantitative learning of the relations of facts
5888 girls mature at a late stage than boys taken from newspaper readings, letter writing and the
5889 girls mature at an earlier stage than boys like is called:
5890 boys and girls mature at the same time a. functional literacy c. Knowledge outcome
5891 there are no marked differences in heir time b. adjustment learning d. Social competence
of maturity A teacher who gives a uniform assignment to be worked out
1 Rationalization is used by student who by all learners in Arithmetic is not observing a
5888 always give explanation or reason for their characteristic of a good assignment. Which characteristic
failures rather than own their faults is overlooked?
5889 like to take the blame for their faults It should be definite
5890 bribe their elders with promises It should be stimulating
5891 substitute words for deeds It should emphasize the essential
2 Which of the following is true of Abnormal Psychology? It should provide for individual differences
5888 it studies the cause of personality defects If a student ask a question which the teacher does not have a
5889 it measures the accomplishments of the ready answer, the latter should:
individual dismiss the question as irrelevant
5890 it concentrates on the scholastic offer a bluff
performance of the individual admit the fact that he doesnt know the answer
5891 it investigates the educational background ask volunteers to answer the question and do research on
of the individual it later.
3 Which of the following is a continuous variable? The heredity traits acquired by a person in his lifetime;
a. weight c. nationality are transmissible to his offspring
b. sex d. race reappear in his future grandparent
Have no influence on the offspring
0 Which of the following is true about ones IQ?
Become recessive traits
23 it remains fairly constant
When student are given a chance to settle differences of
24 it is highly changeable
opinion by discussion, they develop:
25 it is affected by attitude
a. fair play c. irritants
26 it is never constant
b. tolerance d. sociability
1 Transfer of training easily takes place if the activities
involved The schools responsibility towards teenagers gang age is:
23 Are different provide the gang all the freedom it needs
24 Have identical element gives classroom activities to give direction to out-of-
25 Occur in the same place school youth activities
26 Vary in difficulty supervise gang activities
set up norms of conduct or the member of the gang
2 When the learner is well-motivated, he performs his task
23 with indifference c. with arrogance In an intelligence test, a 13-year old girl got a score equivalent
to that of a 15-year old. This means:
b. with disinterest d. with enthusiasm
that the girl must be accelerated
4 A six-year-old child who has a mental age of eight years that the girl is 2-years older mentally
has an IQ of
that the girl has a chronological age of 15
a. 120 b. 130 c. 132 d. 133
that she has a mental age of 13
The ratio obtained by dividing mental age by chronological
age times 100 is called Which statement is not necessary to achieve the learners
interest in a learning activity?
derived quotient
the activity must lead to a practical end
deviation
the activity must be within the ability of the learner
intelligence quotient or IQ
the activity must fill a need recognized by the learner
intelligence ratio
the learner must have the experience that will furnish the
Which of the following was written by Plato?
background for the activity
a. Sic et Non c. The Republic
b. The School and Society d. Emile He is responsible for the theory which recognizes the
importance of developing multiple intelligence
Who among those below asserted that Education is for a. Jean Piaget c. Frederick Freobel
complete living
b. Howard Gardner d. Sigmund Freud
a. Dewey c. Kant
b. Spencer d. Froebel The need to recognize and develop special sensitivity to
language, thus helping the learners to use the right word,
The right of an educational institution and its faculty to phrase and/ or graph to grasp new meaning refers to
prescribe the methods/strategies of teaching refers to:
a. visual intelligence c. feelings sensitivity
building style
b. linguistic intelligence d. jargon
choice of curriculum
53. The sensitivity to tone and pitch, allowing one to produce
academic freedom
musical scoring is intelligence in?
co and extra curricular program
a. musical c. quantitative exercises
The 1987 Constitution provides that religious institution can b. verbal ability d. qualitative analysis
be given
with the students consent Ones ability to do abstract reasoning and manipulate symbols
refers to what type of intelligence?
with the parent/guardian approval
musical
with mayors permit
personality identification
with the schools support
mental ability
Public schools in the Philippines are the contribution of which mathematical-logical
colonizer?
a. American c. Japanese
b. British d. Spanish
The ability to perceive how objects are related in order to
mentally perceive what is seen, thus creating concrete
visual images from memory refers to?
visual-spatial intelligence
musical
language
logical reasoning
The capacity to analyze ones feelings and thus be able to
understand and be able to know the motives of other
peoples actions.
a. spatial c. logical
b. personal d. diametric
The type of intelligence which enables a person to understand
other persons feelings, behavior and motivation.
a. emotional c. social intelligence
b. spatial d. quantitative and qualitative
The type of intelligence which characterizes actress, actors,
mimes, dancers and people of the Arts?
a. bodily-kinesthetic c. research
b. scientific d. emotions
An emerging thrust in determining ones personality, whether
pleasant or unwholesome, this type of personality
measurement is the wholesomeness of ones virtues, i.e.,
values, relationships with other, adjustments to varying
situations, behavior an motivations
emotional quotient (E.Q.)
intelligence quotient (I.Q.)
maladjustment personality
anticipated behavior
It is a measurement of personality which is the result by
dividing the mental age by the chronological age.
emotional quotient (E.Q.)
intelligence quotient (I.Q.)
multiple Intelligence
forecasted behavior quotient
The teacher must be aware that both heredity and
environment represent complex factors, exerting many
specific influences on an individuals growth. Which of
the following statements best represents the influence of
heredity and environment?
Heredity counts; environment is less important.
If the environment is changed, heredity becomes less
important.
The relative influences of heredity and environment can
vary widely in an individuals growth.
In the long run, both tend to cancel each others
influences
None of the above
The best possible way to measure the influence of heredity is
by:
keeping the environment constant.
Ignoring the environment
Studying only fraternal o normal capability
Studying only identical twins of normal capability
Doing none of the above
Educators who contributed to the open education
movement includes:
a. Neill and piaget c. Bruner and Silberman
b. Kohl and kozol d. All of the above
A childs social skills can be measured by:
direct observation and parent-teacher conferences
psychological test
adaptive behavior scales
A and C above
A teacher uses behavioral modification techniques in his
classes. Which of the following student behaviors would
he find most difficult to change?
Aggressive tendencies toward classmates
Poor habits in organizing work materials
Interrupting a speaker
Abandoning a project before it is finished
Learning-disabled children most characteristically have:
low IQ
poor socio-economic backgrounds
an average level of intelligence
minimal brain damage
Which of the following is true about educable mentally
retarded children?
Their IQ range between 50 and 70
They have short attention spans and experience difficulty
in generalizing
Their reading, writing, and arithmetic skills cannot be
improved
A and B above
Which of the following is characteristics of a dyslexic child
Mirror writing
listlessness
Below-average intelligence
Hyperactivity
Primary reading retardation is presumed to be neurologically
based, related to parietal lobe dysfunction?
Inability to relate sound to letter symbols
Inadequate auditory information processing
Left-right directional confusion
Speech aphasia
Students with secondary reading problems have capacity to
read, but are non-readers because of:
auditory problems
congenital defects
visual-acuity impairment
environmental or emotional actors
If a teacher accepts Maslows theory on the hierarchy of
needs, he or she will probably structure objectives to:
meet both the physiological and intellectual needs of
students
eliminate testing
eliminate extrinsic motivations
maintain a certain anxiety level for increased competition
The knowledge explosion has led to crowding more and more
information into curriculum courses. A likely result is that:
the textbook will no longer be the main instructional
medium in many classes
the child may spend more time in school
the teacher may have to rely more on the se of
multimedia materials
all of the above
During the learning process the teacher has most control
over:
the learners
the learning environment
the learning process
the behavior of the learners
Which of the following conditions does NOT contribute to a
climate psychologically suited to learning?
The teacher acts like a real person.
The teacher makes all of the decisions about students
learning activities.
The teacher accepts students as they are
The teacher shows trust in students decisions
William Glasser advocates the frequent use of classroom
meetings, with teacher and students sitting in a small
circle. Which one of the following types of discussion
would NOT be appropriate in such a setting?
An educational-diagnostic conference on the learning
weaknesses of individual students.
An open-ended meeting for the purpose of exploring and
discussing students ideas about the curriculum
A social-problem-solving meeting to resolve teacher or
student problems elating to the school, the class, or
any individual member.
A sensitivity-training meeting for the purpose of helping
students ace their school-related problems and learn
how their actions can affect others
Which of the following does NOT represent a teachers
contribution to the emotional environment of the
classroom?
A strident, compelling voice.
A sustained sense of expectation where student
achievement is concerned
A well-written lesson plan
A sense of humor in a tense situation
According to Jones, student commitment to accomplishing a
learning goal depends on all of the following EXCEPT:
how interesting the goal is
how likely it seems that the goal can be accomplished
what degree of challenge the goal presents
whether the learner will be able to tell if the goal has
been accomplished
whether materials are ready assembled for undertaking
the goal
The teacher who understands the adolescents need to
conform will:
use sarcasm as a disciplinary device
disregard unique responses in discussion and on
examinations
establish a learning climate that fosters feelings of
security
lecture students on their weakness o character
The best public relations agents for a school are the:
a. pupils c. PTA members
b. Teachers and pupils d. principals
The structured curriculum is in decided contrast to the child-
centered curriculum, which:
emphasizes fundamental education
is changeable and is built around student interest and
needs
is oriented to the needs of a democratic society.
Utilizes the theory of mental discipline
According to Bruner, teacher working with young children
should
Push the children to maximum cognitive development as
rapidly as possible
Present all information verbally so the children will listen
well
Present new material from the concrete to the abstract
Present new information from the abstract to the
concrete
from the educational viewpoint, intelligence is:
an abstract concept
a trait that can be manipulated
good judgment
a form of behavior
Every taxonomy of educational objectives:
describes increasingly difficult learning activities
describes levels of goals for learner development
suggest evaluation measure for teacher use
Classifies learning outcomes
A mathematics teacher following Gagnes theory of learning
believes that:
learning can take place under all conditions
learning is mainly a mater of accurate discrimination
learning takes place only when the student is in a
receptive state
learning is reinforced chiefly by classical conditioning
Under which of the following conditions is a childs IQ more
likely to increase?
If the emotional climate in the classroom improves
If the child is given a large research project.
If the child enjoys problem solving and is given ample
opportunity for it
If A and C are true
Intelligence is the basis of education. Education is the
effective means for national development, hence, a
country spends a large portion of its budget for the
systematic training of the learner to attain full
development
Why is education one major concern of every c
country? Because
intelligence has many facets
intelligence is useful in testing
intelligence is a safe gauge for budgetary allocation
intelligence test when carefully conducted, can help in
determining need for future facilities for national
building
There are no two individuals who are the same. Individual
differences, when early recognize and provided for,
enable the teacher to provide different motivations and
approaches in guiding the learning process. Each pupil
differs physically, mentally, socially and emotionally from
other children. Unless the teacher provides for this
nature of the learner, no amount of modern approaches
in teaching can elicit favorable results.
The paragraph highlights the need or motivating learning
Individual differences is an important consideration in
guiding the learner
The above paragraph focuses on teacher-pupil
relationship
It takes about the nature of the learning process
Robert Craig, et al, wrote of the phase of steps in every
learning process. These include: 1.) the focusing of
attention to the stimulation at hand, 2.) the interplay of
the learner and the social factors that surround him, 3.)
the acquisition of a new response or behavior he gives to
the new learning and 4.) Retention which presupposes
that the new learning is acquired.
The above paragraph emphasizes
the learning process
the steps/phase of how individuals learn
the manifestations of learning
why learning is a difficult process
Approaches in teaching change from time to time depending
on the traditional of sophistication attached to the course
being taught. Some mentors believe that the tie tested
ways to teaching is effective. Other are easily carried
away to use modern approaches in imparting new
subject matter. It maybe safe to conclude that once
results are realized in teaching, no specific method can
be considered the one-and-only method to use.
When teaching a subject area, it is safe to
stick to the traditional way
be modern and most recent
get results in teaching
to try any method as they are all theories after all
In the early 1980s programmed teaching became popular in
helping teachers to provide for individual differences in *****THEEND*****
learners. The chunks of the subject matter which are
divided into units are supposed to help the learner WORK HARD, DREAM HARDER
master the lesson, since it is simply to understand the
frame of the lessons. No test o mastery of the units are
done because the purpose is to provide information on human growth and development
certain subject matter 1 c 51 c
Would you as a teacher use programmed instruction 2 c 52 b
if you handle a subject on Values Education? 3 b 53 a
yes, definitely
4 d 54 d
no, not important for the subject matter
5 a 55 a
I dont know
6 d 56 b
Why not if the subject matter calls for it
7 c 57 c
The data/subject matter to teach are gathered in different
8 a 58 a
ways, These include historical sources like surveys,
systematic observations, experimentation, interviews, 9 a 59 a
etc. to be reliable and valid, the data collected must be 10 c 60 b
organized, properly analyzed and interpreted. From these 11 a 61 c
processes, some conclusion or generalization are done to 12 d 62 d
reveal certain relationships like cause & effect. Data 13 c 63 d
gathering involves: 14 d 64 d
tedious and serious study 15 a 65 a
easy does it 16 b 66 c
data gathered are tested and filed, then verified before 17 a 67 d
being used
18 c 68 a
no follow-up needed
19 d 69 d
Heredity and environment play important roles in the
20 d 70 d
function of human beings. DNA or Deoxyribonucleic Acid
is the biological (heredity) band of our genes. Our 21 c 71 a
environment includes the house, school and the 22 c 72 d
community where we live. Whether we become 23 b 73 b
successful or a failure will depend on the interplay of 24 b 74 b
both nature and nurture. 25 d 75 a
If heredity and environment affect the individual, 26 c 76 c
thus, we can conclude that 27 b 77 e
both actors play equal roes in ones life 28 b 78 c
one factor, either heredity or environment exerts more 29 a 79 b
influence than the other
30 a 80 b
neither factor is important
31 a 81 c
nurture and nature are the same
32 a 82 a
The first systematic philosopher to work in the field of
education was 33 b 83 b
a. Socrates c. Plato 34 d 84 c
b. Aristotle d. Rousseau 35 d 85 d
The first state in the worlds history where all human 36 c 86 d
capabilities were allowed to develop freely 37 c 87 b
a. Rome c. Sparta 38 b 88 b
b. Athens d. Germany 39 c 89 c
They are the most practical, pragmatic people who absorbed 40 b 90 b
themselves in the management of their state 41 a 91 a
affairs 42 c 92 a
a. Spartans c. Romans
43 d 93 c
b. Athens d. Chinese
44 d 94 b
96. Invented the first system of writing in the orient
45 a 95 c
a. Phoenicians c. Greeks
46 a 96 b
b. Chinese d. Romans
47 b 97 b
97. first to introduce the use of printing press in the
Philippines 48 b 98 c
a. Romans c. Greeks 49 b 99 b
b. Chinese d. Japanese 50 a 100 b
98. conducted the worlds first civil service test
a. Greeks c. Chinese
b. Romans d. English
To develop the capacity of man only for war was the
educational aim of the ancient
a. Romans c. Athenians
b. Spartans d. Chinese
100. To produce a young man who would be charming
in person and graceful in manner, e.g. a beautiful soul in
a beautiful body is the educational aim of education of
the
a. Romans c. Spartans
b. Athens d. Italians
 LICENSURE EXAMINATION FOR TEACHERS (LET)

Refresher Course

Content Area: MATHEMATICS

Focus: ANALYTIC GEOMETRY
Prepared by: Daisy de Borja-Marcelino
Competencies:
Solve problems involving coordinates of a point, midpoint of a line segment, and distance between two points.
Determine the equation of the line relative to given conditions: slope of a line given its graph, or its equation, or
any two points on it.
Determine the equation of a non-vertical line given a point on it and the slope of a line, which is either parallel or
perpendicular to it.
Solve problems involving

0 the midpoint of a line segment, distance between two points, slopes of lines, distance between a
point and a line, and segment division.

I a circle, parabola, ellipse, and hyperbola.

Determine the equations and graphs of a circle, parabola, ellipse and hyperbola.

I. The Cartesian Plane

Below is a diagram of a Cartesian plane or a rectangular coordinate system, or a coordinate plane.

The two axes separate the plane into

four regions called quadrants. Points can lie in
one of the four quadrants or on an axis. The
points on the x-axis to the right of the origin
correspond to positive numbers; while to the left
of the origin correspond to negative numbers.
The points on the y-axis above the origin
correspond to positive numbers; while below the
origin correspond to negative numbers.
An ordered pair of real numbers, called the coordinates of a point, locates a point in the Cartesian plane. Each
ordered pair corresponds to exactly one point in the Cartesian plane.

The following are the points in the figure on the right:

A(-6,3), B(-2,-3), C (4,-2), D(3,4), E(0,5), F(-3,0).

For numbers 1-2, use the following condition: Two insects M and T are initially at a point A(-4, -7) on a Cartesian
plane.

If M traveled 7 units to the right and 8 units downward, at what point is it now?
Solution: (-4+7, -7-8) or (-3,-15)
If T traveled 5 units to the left and 11 units downward, at what point is it now?
Solution: (-4-5, -7-11) or (-9, -18)

II. The Straight Line

Distance Between Two Points

A. The distance between two points (x1,y1) and (x2,y2) is given by (x1 x2 )2 ( y1 y2 )
2
. Example: Given the points A(2,1) and B(5,4). Determine the length AB.

Solution: AB = 25 14 9 3 9 9 18 or 9 2 or 3 2 .
2 2 2 2

Exercises: For 1-2, use the following condition: Two insects L and O are initially at a point (-1,3) on a Cartesian plane.
1.If L traveled 5 units to the left and 4 units upward, at what point is it now?
A) (-6, 7) B) (4, 7) C) (-6, -1) D) (4, -7)

2.If O traveled 6 units to the right and 2 units upward, at what point is it now?
A) (7, 5) B) (5,5) C) (-7, 5) D) (-5, -5)

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 14

3. Two buses leave the same station at 9:00 p.m. One bus travels at the rate of 30 kph and the other travels at 40 kph. If
they go on the same direction, how many km apart are the buses at 10:00 p.m.?
A) 70 km B) 10 km C) 140 km D) 50 km

4. Two buses leave the same station at 8:00 a.m. One bus travels at the rate of 30 kph and the other travels at 40 kph. If
they go on opposite direction, how many km apart are the buses at 9:00 a.m.?
A) 70 km B) 10 km C) 140 km D) 50 km

5. Two buses leave the same station at 7:00 a.m. One bus travels north at the rate of 30 kph and the other travels east at
40 kph. How many km apart are the buses at 8:00 a.m.?
A) 70 km B) 10 km C) 140 km D) 50 km

Which of the following is true about the quadrilateral with vertices A(0,0), B(-2,1), C(3,4) and D(5,3)?
AD and BC are equal
BD and AC are equal
AB and CD are equal

A) both i and iii B) ii only C) both ii and iii D) i, ii, and iii

7. What is the distance between (-5,-8) and (10,0)?

A) 17 B) 13 C) 23 D) -0.5

B. Slope of a line y
a) The slope of the non-vertical line containing A(x 1,y1) and B(x2,y2) is m y1 y2 or m y2 1 .
xx x x
1 2 2 1
The slope of the line parallel to the x-axis is 0.
The slope of the line parallel to the y-axis is undefined.
The slope of the line that leans to the right is positive.
The slope of the line that leans to the left is negative.

C. The Equation of the line

In general, a line has an equation of the form ax + by + c = 0 where a, b, c are real numbers and that a and b are
not both zero.

D. Different forms of the Equation of the line

General form: ax + by + c = 0.
Slope-intercept form: y = mx + b, where m is the slope and b is the y-intercept.
Point slope form: y y1 m(x x1 ) where (x1, y1) is any point on the line.
y2 y1
Two point form: y y1 (x x1 ) where (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) are any two points on the line.
x2 x1
y x
Intercept form: a b 1 where a is the x-intercept and b is the y-intercept.

Reminders:
A line that leans to the right has positive slope. The steeper the line, the higher the slope is.

p q r
The slopes of lines p, q, r are all positive. Of the three slopes, the slope of line p is the lowest, the slope of r is the
highest.

A line that leans to the left has negative slope. The steeper the line, the lower the slope is.

t s u

The slopes of lines t, s, u are all negative. Of the three slopes, t is the highest, while u has the lowest (because the values
are negative.)

Exercises
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 15
1.What is the slope of 5x - 4y + 12 = 0 ?
A)1.25 B) -1.25 C) 0.8 D) -0.8

2.What is the slope of x = -9?

A) 4 B) 1 C) 0 D) undefined

3.What is the slope of y= 12?

A) 7 B) 1 C) 0 D) undefined

4.What is the slope of

x + y = 1?
4 9
A) 0.4 B) 2.25 C) - 0.4 D) - 2.25

E. Parallel and Perpendicular lines

Given two non-vertical lines p and q so that p has slope m 1 and q has slope m2.
If p and q are parallel, then m1 = m2.
If p and q are perpendicular to each other, then m1m2 = -1.

Segment division
Given segment AB with A(x1,y1) and B(x2,y2).
The midpoint M of segment AB is M ( x1 x2 , y1 y2 ) .
2 2
A r1 AP r1
If a point P divides B in the ratio so that , then the coordinates of P(x,y) can be obtained using
r PB r
2 2

the formula x r1 x2 r2 x1 and y r1 y2 r2 y1 .

rr rr
1 2 1 2
G. Distance of a point from a line

The distance of a point A(x1,y1) from the line Ax + By + C = 0 is given by

By
d Ax1 1 C
.

A2 B2
Exercises

1. Write an equation in standard form for the line passing through (2,3) and (3,4).
a. 5x y = -13 b. x 5y = 19 c. x y = -5 d. x 5y = 17

2. Write an equation in slope intercept form for the line with a slope of 3 and a y-intercept of 28.
a. y = 3x + 28 b. y = 0.5x + 28 c. y = 3x + 28 d. y = 3x + 21

3. Write the equation in standard form for a line with slope of 3 and a y-intercept of 7.
a. 3x y = 7 b. 3x + y = 7 c. 3x + y = 7 d. 3x + y = 7

4. Which of the following best describes the graphs of 2x 3y = 9 and 6x 9y = 18?

a. Parallel b. Perpendicular c. Coinciding d. Intersecting

5. Write the standard equation of the line parallel to the graph of x 2y 6 = 0 and passing through (0,1).
a. x + 2y = 2 b. 2x y = 2 c. x 2y = 2 d. 2x + y = 2
6. Write the equation of the line perpendicular to the graph of x = 3 and passing through (4, 1).
a. x 4 = 0 b. y + 1 = 0 c. x + 1 = 0 d. y 4 = 0
7. For what value of d will the graph of 6x + dy = 6 be perpendicular to the graph 2x 6y = 12?
a. 0.5 b. 2 c. 4 d. 5

III. Conic Section

A conic section or simply conic, is defined as the graph of a second-degree equation in x and y.

In terms of locus of points, a conic is defined as the path of a point, which moves so that its distance from a fixed
point is in constant ratio to its distance from a fixed line. The fixed point is called the focus of the conic, the fixed line is
called the directrix of the conic, and the constant ratio is called the eccentricity, usually denoted by e.

If e < 1, the conic is an ellipse. (Note that a circle has e=0.)

If e = 1, the conic is a parabola.
If e > 1, the conic is hyperbola.

The Circle

A circle is the set of all points on a plane that are equidistant from a fixed point on the plane. The fixed point is called
the center, and the distance from the center to any point of the circle is called the radius.
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 16
Equation of a circle

2 2
general form: x + y + Dx + Ey + F = 0
center-radius form: (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2 where the center is at (h,k) and the radius is equal to r.

Line tangent to a circle

A line tangent to a circle touches the circle at exactly one point called the point of tangency. The tangent line is
perpendicular to the radius of the circle, at the point of tangency.
Exercises
y
For items 1-2, use the illustration on the right. 2

1.5

1. Which of the following does NOT lie on the circle?

1

a. (3,-1) b. (3,0)
c. (2,-1) d. (3,-2) 0.5

0 x

2. What is the equation of the graph?

-3.5 -3 -2.5 -2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5

-0.5

a. y x 31
2
b. ( y 1)
2
x 31 -1

c. ( y 1) x 31
2
d. ( y 1)
2
x 31 -1.5
 -2

B. The Parabola

Definition. A parabola is the set of all points on a plane that are equidistant from a
fixed point and a fixed line of the plane. The fixed point is called the focus and the fixed line is the directrix.

Equation and Graph of a Parabola

 2
The equation of a parabola with vertex at the origin and focus at (a,0) is the y = 4ax. The parabola opens to
right if a > 0 and opens to the left if a < 0.

2
The equation of a parabola with vertex at the origin and focus at (0,a) is x = 4ay. The parabola opens
upward if a > 0 and opens downward if a < 0.

2
The equation of a parabola with vertex at (h , k) and focus at (h + a, k) is The (y k) = 4a(x h).
parabola opens to the right if a > 0 and opens to the left if a < 0.

2
The equation of a parabola with vertex at (h , k) and focus at (h, k + a) is (x h) = 4a(y k).

The parabola opens upward if a > 0 and opens downward if a < 0.

2 2
f) Standard form: (y k) = 4a(x h) or (x h) = 4a(y k)
 General form:y2 + Dx + Ey + F = 0, or x2 + Dx + Ey + F = 0

Parts of a Parabola

The vertex is the point, midway between the focus and the directrix.

The axis of the parabola is the line containing the focus and perpendicular to the directrix. The parabola is
symmetric with respect to its axis.

The latus rectum is the chord drawn through the focus and parallel to the directrix (and therefore perpendicular
to the axis) of the parabola.

2
In the parabola y =4ax, the length of latus rectum is 4a, and the endpoints of the latus rectum are (a, -2a) and (a,
2a).

In the figure at the right, the vertex of the parabola is the origin,
the focus is F(a,o), the directrix is the line containing LL' ,
the axis is the x-axis, the latus rectum is the line containing CC' .

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 17

 2 16
The graph of x y. The graph of (y-2)2 = 8 (x-3).
3

C. Ellipse

An ellipse is the set of all points P on a plane such that the sum of the distances of P from two fixed points F and F on the
plane is constant. Each fixed point is called focus (plural: foci).

Equation of an Ellipse

a) If the center is at the origin, the vertices are at ( a, 0), the foci are at ( c,0), the endpoints of the minor axis
2 2 2 x2 y2
are at (0, b) and b a c , then the equation is 1. a2 b2

b) If the center is at the origin, the vertices are at (0, a), the foci are at (0, c), the endpoints of the minor axis
2 2 2 x2 y2 2 2
are at ( b, 0) and b a c , then the equation is 1 . b a
c) If the center is at (h, k), the distance between the vertices is 2a, the principal axis is horizontal and
(x h)2 ( y k)2
b2 a2 c2 , then the equation is 1. a2 b2
d) If the center is at (h, k), the distance between the vertices is 2a, the principal axis is vertical and
( y k)2 (x h)2
b2 a2 c2 , then the equation is 1. a2
2
b
 y

Parts of an Ellipse (c,

b2
) B(0,b ( c,
b2
)
For the terms described below, refer to the ellipse a a
shown with center at O, vertices at V(-a,0) and V(a,0), foci at
F(-c,0) and F(c,0), endpoints of the minor axis
at B(0,-b) and B(0,b), endpoints of one latus rectum V(- F(- O F(c,0 V(a,0 x
b2 b2
b2 b2 (c, ) (c, )
at G (-c, ) and G(-c, ) and the other at a a

a a B(0,-

b2 ) and G(c, b2 ).
H (c,
a a
 The center of an ellipse is the midpoint of the segment joining the two foci. It is the intersection of the axes of the
ellipse. In the figure above, point O is the center.
The principal axis of the ellipse is the line containing the foci and intersecting the ellipse at its vertices. The major
axis is a segment of the principal axis whose endpoints are the vertices of the ellipse. In the figure, V 'V is
the major axis and has length of 2a units.
The minor axis is the perpendicular bisector of the major axis and whose endpoints are both on the ellipse.
In the figure, B' B is the minor axis and has length 2b units.
d) The latus rectum is the chord through a focus and perpendicular to the major axis. G'G and H ' H are the
2b2
latus rectum, each with a length of a .

y y

(2,6)
(0, 3) (8,5)
9 (-6,4)
(-4, 9) (4, )
5 5
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 (2,1) 18
(-5,0) (-4,0) (4,0) (5,0) (-8,1) (12,1)
O x O x
9 9 (8,3)
) )
(-4,- 5 (4,- 5
(0, -3) (2,-4)
 x2 y2 (x 2)2 ( y 1) 2
The graph of 1. The graph of 1.
25 9 100 25
Kinds of Ellipses
Horizontal ellipse. An ellipse is horizontal if its principal axis is horizontal. The graphs above are both horizontal
ellipses.
Vertical ellipse. An ellipse is vertical if its principal axis is vertical.

D. The Hyperbola

A hyperbola is the set of points on a plane such that the difference of the distances of each point on the set from two fixed
points on the plane is constant. Each of the fixed points is called focus.
Equation of a hyperbola
If the center is at the origin, the vertices are at ( a, 0), the foci are at ( c,0), the endpoints of the minor axis are
2 2 2
at (0, b) and b c a , then the equation is x2 y2 1.
a2 b2
b) If the center is at the origin, the vertices are at (0, a), the foci are at (0, c), the endpoints of the minor axis are
2 2 2
at ( b, 0) and b c a , then the equation is y2 x2 1.
a2 b2
2 2 2
c) If the center is at (h, k), the distance between the vertices is 2a, the principal axis is horizontal and b c a
(x h)2 ( y k)2
, then the equation is 1.
a2 b2
2 2 2
d) If the center is at (h, k), the distance between the vertices is 2a, the principal axis is vertical and b c a ,
then the equation is ( y k)2 (x h)2 1
a2 b2
Parts of a hyperbola

For the terms described below, refer to the hyperbola shown which has its center at O, vertices at V(-a,0) and

V(a,0), foci at F(-c,0) and F(c,0) and endpoints of one latus rectum at G (-c, b ) and G(-c, b ) and the other at
2 2

a a
2 2
b ) and H(c, b ).
H (c,
a a

The hyperbola consists of two separate parts called branches.

The two fixed points are called foci. In the figure, the foci are at ( c,0).

The line containing the two foci is called the principal axis. In the
figure, the principal axis is the x-axis.

The vertices of a hyperbola are the points of intersection of the

hyperbola and the principal axis. In the figure, the vertices are at ( a,0).

The segment whose endpoints are the vertices is called the transverse axis. In the figure V 'V is the transverse axis.

f) The line segment with endpoints (0,b) and (0,-b) where b2 c2 a2 is called the conjugate axis, and is a
perpendicular bisector of the transverse axis.
g) The intersection of the two axes is the center of the hyperbola .

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 19

h) The chord through a focus and perpendicular to the transverse axis is called a latus rectum. In the figure, G'G is a

latus rectum whose endpoints are G (-c,

b2 ) and G(-c, b2 ) and has a length of 2b2 .
a a a

The Asymptotes of a Hyperbola

Shown in the figure on the right is a hyperbola

with two lines as extended diagonals of the
rectangle shown.

These two diagonal lines are said to be the asymptotes of the curve, and are helpful in sketching the graph of a
y
hyperbola. The equations of the asymptotes associated with x2 y2 1arey b x and b x . Similarly, the
a2 b2 a a
equations of the asymptotes associated with y2 x2 1are y a x and y a x .

a2 b2 b b
y y
(6,9)

(-
9,6) F(0,6) (9,6)
3yx0
(-3,0) (0,3)
F(-6,0) O (3,0) F(6,0) x
O x
(0,-3)
(6,-9) 3yx0
F(0,-6)

The graph of x2 y2 1. The graph of y2 x2 1.

9 27 9 27

PRACTICE EXERCISES

Directions: Choose the best answer from the choices given and write the corresponding letter of your choice.

For items 1-5, use the illustration on the right.

3
M
1. Which of the following are the coordinates of A? 2
a. (1,2) b. (2,1) c. (-3,3) d. (2,-3) x 1 A
2. What is the distance between points M and T? -3 -2 -1 01 2 3
-1
a. 61 units b. 6 sq. units c. 51 units d. 8 units
H -3
3. Which of the following points has the coordinates (-3,-1) -2
a. M b. A c. T d. H T
4. Which of the following is the area of the triangle formed with vertices M, A and H? y
a. 5 sq. units b. 10 sq. units c. 5 units d. 10 units
5. Which of the following is the equation of the line containing points A and T? O(0,b) V

a. y= 2 b. x=2 c. y+2x=3 d. y-2x+3=0

x
6. Suppose that an isosceles trapezoid is placed on the Cartesian plane as shown
0 D(a,0) E(b,0)
On the right, which of the following should be the coordinates of vertex V?
a. (a,b) b. (b+a, 0) c. (b-a,b) d. (b+a,b)
7. The points (-11,3), (3,8) and (-8,-2) are vertices of what triangle?
a. Isosceles b. Scalene c. Equilateral d. Right

8. What is the area of the triangle in #7?

a. 40.5 sq units b. 41.8 sq units c. 42 sq units d. 46.8 sq units
9. Which of the following sets of points lie on a straight line?
a. (2,3), (-4,7), (5,8) b. (-2,1), (3,2), (6,3) c. (-1,-4), (2,5), (7,-2) d. (4,1), (5,-2), (6,-5)
3
10. If the point (9,2) divides the segment of the line from P 1(6,8) to P2(x2,y2) in the ratio r = 7 , give the coordinates of P2.

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 20

 a. (16,12) b. (16, 15) c. (14,15) d. (12,12)
11. Give the fourth vertex, at the third quadrant, of the parallelogram whose three vertices are (-1,-5), (2,1) and (1,5).
a. (-3,-2) c. (-3,-4) c. (-4,-1) d. (-2,-1)
12. The line segment joining A(-2,-1) and B(3,3) is extended to C. If BC = 3AB, give the coordinates of C.
a. (17,12) b. (15,17) c. (18,15) d. (12,18)
13.The line L2 makes an angle of 600 with the L1. If the slope of L1 is 1, give the slope of L2.
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
a. (3 + 2 ) b. (2 + 2 ) c. (2 + 3 ) d. (3 + 3 )
0
14. The angle from the line through (-4,5) and (3,m) to the line (-2,4) and (9,1) is 135 . Give the value of m.
a.7 b. 8 c. 9 d. 10
15.Which equation represents a line perpendicular to the graph of 2x + y = 2?
a. y = -0.5x 2 b. y = 2x + 2 c. y = 2x 2 d. y = 0.5x + 2
16. Which of the following is the y intercept of the graph 2x 2y + 8 = 0?
a. -4 b. -2 c. 2 d. 4
17. Which of the following may be a graph of x y = a where a is a positive real number?
a. b. c. d.
y y y y

x x x x

18. Write an equation in standard form for a line with a slope of 1 passing through (2,1).
a. x + y = 3 b. x + y = 3 c. x + y = 3 d. x y = 3
b.
For items 19-22, use the illustration on the right.
T
y

19. Which of the following are the coordinates of A? 2

a. (1,1) b. (1,-1) A .
5

c. (-1,1) d. (-1,-1) 1

20. What is the distance between points A and H?

0.5

a. 61 units b. 6 sq. units 0

x
-
3
.
5 -3 -2.5 -2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5

-
0
c. 51 units d. 8 units .
5

21. Which of the following points has the coordinates (-2,-2)?

-
1

a. M b. A H
-
1
M .

c. T d. H 5

-
2

22. Which of the following is the equation of the given graph?

d. y x2
a. y x 2 . 2
b. y x 2 . c. y x2 2 2. 2.
23. Which of the following is the equation of the line containing points M and T?
a. y= 2 b. x=2 c. y-2x-2=0 d. y+2x+2=0
2
24. What is the shortest distance of x 8y from x 3?
a. 1 unit b. 2 units c. 3 units d. 8 units
2 2
25. Which of the following is a focus of y x 1?
1
2 4
a. (0,-4) b. (-4,0) c. (0,4) d. (4,0)
2 2
26. What are the x-intercepts of x y 1?
4 9
a. none b. 2 c. 3 d. 4

27. Which of the following is a graph of a hyperbola?

a. y
b. 15
y

1
5
1
0
1
0

0 x

-
3
0 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 1015 2025 30
0 x
-
3
0 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0510152025 30
-5

-5

-
1
0

-
1
0

-
1
5

-
1
5

c. d.
 y
2 y
2

1.5

1.5

1
1

0.5
0.5

0 x
0 x
-3.5 -3 -2.5 -2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
-3.5 -3 -2.5 -2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5

-0.5
-0.5
 -1 -1

-1.5 -1.5

-2 -2

28. Which of the following is an equation of an ellipse that has 10 as length of the major axis and has foci which are 4 units
away from the center?

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 21


y 2 x 2 1 y2 x2 1 c. y 2 x 2 1 d. y 2 x 2 1
a. b.
5 3 16 25
25 9 9 16

For items 29-31, consider the graph on the right. y

29. Which of the following is the equation of the
graph? 10
2 2
100 y 25x 2500
100x 25y 2 2500
2
x
100 y 2 25x2 2500 -30 -20 -10
0
0 10 20 30

100x2 25y 2 2500

30. What are the x-intercepts of the graph?
a. none b. 2 -10

c. 5 d. 10

31. What kind of figure is shown on the c. hyperbola d. Parabola

graph? a. circle b. ellipse

32. Which of the following is the center of the y

graph shown on the right?
a. (0,0) b. (0,10) 10

c. (10,0) c. (0,-10)

33. Which of the following is a focus of the 0 x

graph shown on the right? -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30

a. (0,0) b. (0,10)
c. (0,5) c. (0,-10)
-10

34. What is the area of the shaded region?

a. 4 units b. 4 square units
c. 16 units d. 16 square units
 LICENSURE EXAMINATION FOR TEACHERS (LET)

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 22

 Refresher Course

Content Area: MATHEMATICS

Focus: ADVANCED ALGEBRA
Prepared by: Daisy de Borja-Marcelino
Competencies: Show mastery of the basic terms, concepts and equations in Advanced Algebra involving radicals, rational
exponents and functions. Solve, evaluate and manipulate symbolic and numerical problems in above areas by applying
fundamental principles and processes.

KEY IDEAS
Some Helpful Tips in Answering the LET

Read the question/s or the items carefully and understand what they say.
Determine what is/are wanted or what is/are asked for.
Find out what is/are given and which data are needed to solve the problem.
Reason out what processes (operations) to apply and the order in which they are to be applied.
Summarize the problem by means of an open number sentence.
Compute carefully. Check each step in the computations.
Decide the reasonableness of the result.
Check the result by seeing to it that the result satisfies all the conditions of the problem.

RATIONAL EXPONENTS
n th
If a is a real number and n is any positive integer, the symbol a denotes the n power of a. The real number a is
called the base and n is called the exponent. In symbols,

an a a a ... a
.
n factors

Examples: a) 3333 34 or 81. b) 2m3 2m 2m 2m.

14 1 1 1 1 2
c) . d) 1.31.3 1.3 .
2 2 2 2 2
e) math math math . 2
e) 2 m m 2 m . 2
Note that any base raised to the power of 1, is just the base. Moreover, any base raised to the power of 0 is 1,
while 00 is indeterminate.
0 1
Examples: a) 9 1. b) 4 4. c) (-m)1 = - m. d) z0 = 1.
0 1 1 1
e) h2op3e 1. f) 38.230 1 . g) j2o3 y5 j2o3y5 . h) 4 m 0 a1 4 a .
Laws of Exponents

If a and b are real numbers and m and n are positive real numbers, then the following are true.
anman
aman amn . m
.
a 0 am amn abnanbn
If m n and , then
an . .
a 0 am 1 a n
an
If n m and , then . If b 0 , then .
n
a anm b bn
n 0
a a 1
If a 0 , then an .

Examples: a) 42 3 46. b) 23 22 232 25 32. c) (3 x 4 )2 = 32 x 42.

32 5 2
1. 3
3 52
3 3 1 1
32533
2 3
d) 3 e) 2 27. f). 5 3 .
3 3 3 27
Exercises
5
1. In the expression 8m , 5 is called the ________.
A. base B. coefficient C. constant D. exponent
0 2
25 m 20m9n3s14
0

2. Evaluate 5m0 10s6n8m100 .

2
A. 5 B. 23m12n4s-2 C. m 20 D. undefined
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 23
 1 1 1

3. Anthony wrote 3a 4b 4 = (3a) + 4b 4 . Which of the following is his misconception? 4

It is possible to factor out the exponent.
It is possible to distribute exponents over a sum.
The exponents should be multiplied with the base.
The coefficient inside the parentheses should be added.
5r 4 2 25r 6
3 5
4. Is equal to ? Why or why not?

3
s 9s
0 Yes, for the exponents inside the parenthesis and the numerical coefficients should be added to 2.
I No, for the exponents inside the parenthesis and the numerical coefficients should be subtracted from 2.
II Yes, for the exponents inside the parenthesis should be added and the numerical coefficients
should be raised to 2.

III No, for the exponent inside the parenthesis should be multiplied by 2 and the numerical coefficients
should be raised to 2.
x1 2 4
Explain why is not equal to x ?
3

Because the exponents should be added.

Because the exponents should be multiplied.
Because the numerator should be divided by the denominator.
Because the exponent of the numerator should be subtracted by the exponent of the denominator.
5 3 2 4 2
Which of the following is the product of x y z and x y z ?
10 12 2 10 12 2 7 7 3 7 7 3
A. 2x 2y 2z B. x y z C. 2x 2y 2z D. x y z
5
7. Give the product of a and a3 2a5 11a.
10a655
4 5 2 3
A. 5a 10a 55a C. 5a a
4 6 2 3 5
B. 5a 10a 55a D. 5a 10a 55a
Marlon claims that 2 3 5
2 is equal to 2 . Is he correct? Why or why not? 8

A. Yes, for the exponents inside the parenthesis and the numerical coefficients should be added to 5.
No, for the exponents inside the parenthesis should be multiplied by 2 and the numerical coefficients should be
raised to 5.
No, for the exponents should be multiplied.
Yes, for the exponents should be added.

The mentioned laws of exponents also hold when m and n are positive rational numbers.
Examples: The following are true if there is no zero denominator.
1 1 1 1 2 5 2 5 7
3 3
a) 32 32 3 2 2 3 3. b) m m m 3 3 m 3 .
1

2 5
2 1 1 5 3 2

3
c) 5 5 3 3 5 3. d) p7 p 7 7 p 7 .
1 3

53 p7
2
2 2
3
e
e 33 0 2 3 4 14 24 34 4 8 12

e) 2 e 1. f) 3x y 3 x y 3x y .
e 3
22 5y
art 5 art 5 x 4 1 1 1
g) 2
. h)
11y
11y 5 y
6y
3y
.

xy
xy 5 x 4 x 44 x 4 x 2
Negative Exponents
-n
1
If a is a nonzero real number and n is any rational number, then a = .
an
To simplify algebraic expressions with negative exponents is just to express the given expression into an
equivalent quantity where the exponents become positive.
Examples: Simplify the following such that they only have positive exponents.

1 3
3 1

a) 2 b) 7
4 c) 2m
4

1
1 3
4 1 1 1
Solution: a) 3 2
1
. b) 7 3
. c) 2m
4
1
.
 32 74 4
Examples: Simplify the following such that they only have positive exponents. Assume nonzero bases and no denominator
is zero.

162 m4 a t3
t
a) 44 b) m3 c) a2 d) 3

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 24

 2 4 3 4 3 1
16 m at m g
f)
g) 5

e) 44m3a2t3
g1h3
3
2 h) x 22
Solution:

a) 162 = 42 2 44 1. b) m4 = m43m43m1 1.

44 44 44 m3 m
a t3

t
c) a2 = a12 a12 a3 d) 3 = 1.

e) 162m4at3 = 4 m aa t 44 m3a3t3 a3 .
4 3 2 3

44m3a2t3 162 m4t3 44 m4t 3 m

f) m4g3 = m4 g3 1 1 g 31 h3 = g 31h3 g 4h3 .
g1h3 1g 1 h3 m4 m4 m4
5
1 1 1 5
3 2

2
g) 5
3
2 = (5)( 2 ) (3)( 2 ) 2 3.
2

2 1 1 1
x2 x2x
h) x 2 = 2 or 2 orx2 4x 4 .
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
x2x x x
Note that 2 2 2
x2 4x 4 is not equal to x2 4x 4 .
is equal to but
a
Whenever the exponent of a base is in rational form b where b 0, the expression can always be expressed in
radical form.

RADICALS
1
n n
If n is a positive integer and a is a real number for which a is defined, then the expression a is called a
1
n
radical, and a=a n .

n
The symbol is a radical sign, the number a is the radicand and n is the index of the radical a.
3
Examples: a) In the expression 5 , the number 3 is called the index and 5 is the radicand.
1
4
b) The expression 27 4 can be written as 27 .
When a radical notation has no index, it is understood that n=2 or we are going to extract the square roots of the
radicand.
1
2
Examples: a) 49 49. b) 3 2 2 3 3.
Simplified radicals

An expression with radicals is simplified when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Exponents of the radicand and index of the radical have no common factor except 1.
The radicand has no factor raised to a power greater than or equal to the index.
All indicated operations have been performed (if possible).
No denominator contains a radical.
The radicand has no fractions.

m
Radical notation of a
n
m

n
If a is a real number, m is an integer and a is a real number, then a n = n a m = n am .
Examples: Write each exponential expression using radical notation.
1 3 3
3 4 2
a) a b) m c) 5
 1 3 3

3
Solution: a) a = 3 a . b) m
4 4
=( m) .
3
c) 5 2 = 2 53 = 5
2 3
or 53 .
Examples: Write each radical expression using exponential notation and simplify.
2
3 3
a) 22 b) 7 c) x6
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 25
 1 1 6
1

27=(2
33 3
Solution: a) 22 = 22 2 . b) 3
7)3 = . 3 c) 3 x 6 = x3 = x .
2

n
a n a
If n is an even positive integer, then a = a = and if n is an odd positive integer then
n n =a.
Examples: Simplify each of the following and give all the roots.
4
a) 625 b) 81 c) 169x6 d)
3
27x6 y9

Solution:
2 4
a) 625 25 25. b) 81 =
4
34 = 3.
169x6 = 132 x3 2 = 13x .
3

3 27x6 y9 =
3
3
3
x y
2 3 3 3 2 3
=3x y .

For all real numbers a and b, and positive integers m and n for which the indicated roots are real numbers, the
following are true.

( a )( b )= n ab
n n
. mn a mn a .
n
an a

b
n b where b is not equal to zero.
Examples: The following are true.

81 81
a) 3 5 15. b) 4x 81x 8
24 x . c) 12 x6 x3 12 .
Examples: Simplify each of the following.

a) 3
8 b) 4
32 y5
125 243
3
2
Solution: a) 3 8 8 3 (2) 3
2 .
1
2
5 3 53 5 5 5
2 y
b) 4
32 y 5
=
4 16 2 y y 4

4 2 4
2y y 4

4
2y
=
2y
4
2y
=
2y 4
54 y .
4 4 4 4

243 81 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Operations on Radical Expressions

Addition and Subtraction

Radicals with the same radicand and the same index are called like radicals. Like radicals are added or subtracted
by using the distributive property of real numbers. Moreover, only like radicals can be combined.
3
Examples: a) Give the sum of 7 , 3 3 7 , 2 3 7 and 4 3 7 .
Evaluate 10 15 +3 15 - 15 .
If the lengths of the sides of a triangle is 24 cm, 2 6 cm and 4cm, give its perimeter.

3
Solution: a) 7 +3 3 7 +2 3 7 + 4 3 7 =10 3 7 . b) 10
15 +3 15 - 15 = 12 15 .
c) Given a triangle, its perimeter is determined by adding the lengths of its sides. Hence,

24 cm + 2 6 + 4cm = 4 6 cm + 2 6 cm + 4cm
= 2 6 cm + 2 6 cm+ 4cm = 4 6 cm + 4cm.

Multiplication of Radicals
n n
Note that ab = n a b allows multiplication of radicals with the same index.
Examples: Give the product of the following in simplest form. Take only the positive roots.
 6
a) 8 9 10 m2 (3 m m2 ) c) (3 7 + 8) (3 7 - 8)

=69
6 9 544
Solution: a) 8 10 8 10 54 80 54 16 5 5 216 5 .
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 26
 23 m2 [3 m 33 m2 ] = 23 m2m 2 33 m2m2 23 m3 -(6) 3 m4

0 2m 6m3 m .

(3 7 + 8) (3 7 - 8) = 9 72 82 = 97 8=63-8=55.
Exercises

4
1. In the expression 3 5 , 5 is called the ________.
A. base B. index C. radicand D. root
2
5
2. Write 3 as a radical expression.
2
A. 35 B.
5
32 C.
3
3 D. 2
5
3
5 3
3. Write 5y as an exponential expression.
1 3

B.5y D.5y
A. 5y35 3 5
C. 5 5 y
3
3 5

4. The sides of a triangle measure 315 m, 5 15 m and 15 m. What is the perimeter of the triangle?
A. 5 15 cm B. 8 15 cm C. 10 15 cm D. 12 15 cm
5. The side of a square measures 4 3 m. Give its perimeter.
A. 4 3m B. 8 3m C. 16 3m D. 20 3m

FUNCTIONS
A relation is a set of ordered pairs (x, y) such that for every first element x, there corresponds at least one y. The
set of all first elements is called the domain of the relation, whereas the set of second elements is the codomain of the
relation.
A function is a relation such that for every first element x of the ordered pair (x, y), there corresponds a unique
second element y. The set of all first elements is called the domain of the function, whereas the set of second elements is
the range of the function.
Tests for a Function
There are some tests that can determine whether a relation is a function or not. We have a function if no two
pairs in the set consisting of ordered pairs have the same first components.

Examples: a) The relation {(Mr. Cruz, Mark), (Mr. Cruz, Mary), (Mr. Gonzales, Art), (Mrs. Tan, Alice), (Miss Peralta, Niko)} is
not a function because more than one ordered pair have the same first component- Mr. Cruz.
b) The relation {(-1,0), (0, 1), (1, 2), (2, 3), (3, 4)} has no ordered pair that has the same first component. Thus,
it is a function. Moreover, its domain is the set {-1,0,1,2,3} and its range is {0,1,2,3,4}.
c) Consider the relation {(-3, -9), (-2, -4), (-1, -1), (0, 0),(1, -1), (2, -4), (3, -9)}. This relation is considered a
function because it has no ordered pair that has the same first component.

A relation may be described by a set of ordered pairs. A function is described by a set of ordered pairs with no two
pairs having the same first components.
Example: The table below shows the relation of the distance traveled by a car for a given length of time.
d = rt
Number of Hours 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Distance 60 120 180 240 300 360 420 480 540 600

It can be observed that the distance traveled depends upon the number of hours or time. We say that distance is
a function of time. The relation can be expressed as d = rt or d = 60t in this particular example.

Example: The area of a square is a function of the length of its side.

A=s
2
Side 1 2 3 4 5
Area 1 4 9 16 25

If a relation described by an equation or defined by a rule, a functional relationship exists if a change in the
independent variable x causes a change in the dependent variable y.

Another method of showing the relationship between the elements of two sets is by means of an arrow diagram.
 0 0
Example: An arrow diagram for the relation y = 8x, where x is in set
of whole numbers from 0 to 3, is shown on the right. 1 8

2 16

24
x3
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 27
 0 2

2
Example: An arrow diagram for the relation {(x, y) y = x + 2} is -1
shown on the right where x = -3, -2,-1,0,1,2,3 and y = 2,3,6,11. 1 3

-2
2 6

-3
3 11

A relation described by an arrow diagram is a function if:

there exists a one-to-one correspondence between the elements of the two sets
there exists a many-to-one correspondence between the elements of the two sets.
 Another method of identifying a function from a mere relation is through its graph. A graph of a relation is a
function if a vertical line is drawn through the graph will intersect the graph in no more than one point.
The most fundamental way to graph a function is to plot points. Once the behavior of the graph of the function
becomes familiar, graphing becomes easier. Note that in graphing functions, we include all possible real numbers in the
domain.
We may start by creating a table of values in order to find out the behavior of the function. It is very important to
choose different numbers to get a clear picture of the graph. That is, it is helpful to generate as many points possible.
1
f x, yy 3x
Example: Graph .
2
Solution: We note that f x, y y 3x 1 can be expressed in terms of slope and m = 3 and intercept
2
b = 0.5 . By plotting of points, we consider first a table of values.
X -2 -1 0 1 2 3
f(x) -6.5 -3.5 2.5 5.5 8.5
-0.5

x
0
-14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14

-2

-4

-6

-8

Note that the when a vertical line is drawn through the graph, it will intersect the graph in no more than one
point. Hence, the given relation is a function.

Example: If we have f(x) = x, this function is called an identity function defined by f = {(x, y) y = x}.
Let us graph the identity function by assigning to x the values 0, 1, 2. Hence, the corresponding values of y are 0,
1 and 2 respectively. Moreover, the line is determined by the following points.
X -2 -1 0 1 2 3
f(x) -2 -1 0 1 2 3
y
8

We now have the graph on the right. 4

0 x
-14 -12 -10-8-6-4 -202 468101214

-2

-4

-6

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 -8 28

 If f is defined by f = {(x, y) y = b} where the range of the function f consists of one number, then f is a constant
function whose graph is a straight line parallel to the x-axis.

Example: Graph f(x) = 4.

Solution: We now have first a table of values.

x -2 -1 0 1 2 3
f(x) 4 4 4 4 4 4

6
y

x
0

-7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

-1

-2

-3

2
Non-example: Graph y x.

Solution: We now have first a table of values.

x 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
y 0 1 -1 2 2
2 - 2 3 - 3
y
4

0 x
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

-1

-2

-3

-4

Observe that the graph of the said set of points shows that if any vertical line drawn through the graph intersects
the graph at more than one point. Hence, it is not a function.

The graph of a relation shows a function if any vertical line drawn through the graph intersects the graph at no
more than one point.

Non-examples: The graphs below do not define functions.

 y
y
2.5
4

2
3

1.5
2

1
1

0.5
0 x
-8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 x
0
-1 -4.5 -4 -3.5 -3 -2.5 -2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3

-0.5
-2
-1
-3
-1.5

-4
PRACTICE EXERCISES

Directions: Choose the best answer from the choices given. Write the corresponding letter of your choice.

3
1. In the expression 9m , 3 is called the ________.
A. base B. coefficient C. constant D. exponent

1 3
2. Evaluate
77 77 ?

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 29

 2 4
2 7
A. 7 B. 7 C. 7 7 D. 7
1 3 2
3.Which of the following is equal to m
2 n 2 ?

3 2 3
A. 0 B. 1 C. mn D. m n
3
4
4. Which of the following is equal to 2 ?
4 3 4 4
A. 23 B. 2 C. 2 D. 23
3 34m
5. Give the index of the expression .
A. 1 B. 2 C. 3 D. 34 m
6.In the expression 888tm , 888tm is called the __________.
A. Index B. Radicand C. Radical sign D. Exponent

7.Which of the following is equal to

5?
5
A. 0 B. 1 C. 5 D. 2 5
8. The length of a rectangle is 3 3 m and its width is 2 2 m. Which of the following is the area of the rectangle? A.
2 2 2 2
10 m B. 5 6m C. 9 6 m D. 6 6 m

9. Rosalinda was asked to get the perimeter of a rectangle whose width is 2 5 mm and whose length is 5 5 mm. Which
of the following should be her answer?
A. 7 10 mm B. 14 10 mm C. 14 5 mm D. 10 5 mm
Is the sum of 2 , 3 , and 7 equal to 42 ? Why or why not?
No, because the indices should be multiplied.
No, because the terms should not be combined for these are not like radicals.
Yes, because the radicands should be added and the indices should be copied.
Yes, because the terms have no coefficient and the radicands should be added.
3
Write as an exponential expression: 3x2 .
1 2

B. 3x D.3x
A. 3x23 2
3 C. 3 3x
2
3
12.The sides of a triangle measure 2 7 m, 3 7 m and 28 m. Give the perimeter of the triangle.
A. 5 7m 7m B. 7 C. 9 7 m D. 35 7m
13.The side of a square measures 5 22 cm. Give its perimeter.
A. 10 22 cm B.15 22 cm C. 20 22 cm D. 20 11 cm
24k 2k
14. A secretary can type 3 words in 3 minutes. How many words can she type in a minute?
 4 2
18. Which of the following is equal to 3
5
35 ?

6 6 6 8
5
A. 310 B. 610 C. 3 D. 325
4

35
19. Which of the following is equal to 4 ?
5
3
4 8
5 5
A. 0 B. 1 C. 3 D. 3

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 30

 3
2 1
20. Evaluate x
3 y 3 .

5
2 3
A. 0 B. 1 C. x y D. x y

Which of the following sets of ordered pairs describes a function?

{(-1, 4), (2, 8), (2, 20), (9, 36), (-3, -12)}
{(24, 6), ( 20, 5), (16, 4), (12, 3)}
{(1, 2), (-1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 3), (2, 4)}
{(1, -1), (-1, 1), (4, -2), (4, 2), (9, 3), (9, -3)}
Which of the following sets of ordered pairs DOES NOT describe a function?
{(-1, 4), (2, 8), (5, 20), (9, 36), (5, -12)}
{(-3, -2), (-2, -1), (-1, 0), (0, 1)}
{(24, 6), ( 20, 5), (16, 4), (12, 3)}
{(1, 1), (1, 2), (1, 4), (2, 3), (2, 4)}
Which of the following sets of ordered pairs describes a function?
{(0.5, 4), (1, 8), (1.5, 20), (2, 36), (-1, -12)}
{(4, 6), ( 4, 5), (16, 4), (3, 3)}
{(-1, 2), (-1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 3), (2, 4)}
{(0.25, -1), (0.5, 1), (0.75, -2), (1, 2), (9, 3), (9, -3)}
Which of the following sets of ordered pairs DOES NOT describe a function?
{(1.5, 1), (2, 1), (2.5, 1), (3, 1), (3.5, 1)}
{(-3, -2), (-2, -1), (-1, 0), (0, 1)}
{(24, 6), ( 20, 5), (16, 4), (12, 3)}
{(9, 1), (9, 2), (9, 4), (9, 3), (9, 4)}
Which of the following describes a function?
A.

x 1 1 2 4 4 6 6
y -2 -4 -6 -8 -10 -12 -14
B.

x 1 3 5 7 9 11 13
y -2 4 -6 8 -10 12 -14
C.

x 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
y 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
D.

x 1 2 3 4 5 1 2
y 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5

26. Which of the following describes a function?

A.

x -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 7
y 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
B.

x -1 1 -2 2 3 3 4
y 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
C.

x 1 -2 3 -1 -2 -3 4
y -2 -4 -6 8 10 12 14
D.

x 1 2 3 4 5 1 2
y -0.5 -1 -1.5 -2 -2.5 -3 -3.5

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 31

27. Which of the following arrows or mapping diagrams DOES NOT specify a function?

A. B.

1 6
-2 9
2 7
-1 4
3 8
0 0
4 9

C. D.
-2 4 3 2
2
-3 9 6 3
3
-4 9
4 16 4

28. Which of the following arrows or mapping diagrams specifies a function?

A. B.

2 1
4 2 9 4
6 5

C. D.
4 1 1 8
 9 4 2 4
2
0
16
C . 7
29. Which of the following arrows or mapping diagrams DOES NOT specify a function?
A. B.

6 6
-1 9
7 7
0 4
8 8
1 0
9 9
C. D.

-2 3 -4 2

2
-3 9 -9 3
3
-4 -16
4 12 4
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 32
30. Which of the following graphs is a function?

A. C.
3 y
y
2
2.5

1.5
2

1
1.5

0.5

1
0 x
-3.5 -3 -2.5 -2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
0.5
-0.5

0 x
-1 -3.5 -3 -2.5 -2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5

-0.5
-1.5

-1
-2

-1.5

B. D.
y 3 y
2.5

2 2

1.5

1
1

0.5 0 x
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3

0 x
-3.5 -3 -2.5 -2 -1.5 - 1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2.5 3 3.5
2
-1

-0.5

-1 -2

-1.5
-3
 31. Which is NOT a graph of a function?
A. B. C. D.

100 30 4 30
80
25 2 25
60
40 20 0 20

20 15 -4-3-2-1 -2 01234 15
0
10 10
-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 --120 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 -4
-40 5 5
-60 0 -6 0
-80
-100 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1-5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 -8 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1-5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
-120 -10 -10 -10

32. Which of the following is NOT a graph of a function?

A. y C.
2 y

1.5
1.5

1
0.5

0 x

0.5 -3.5-3 -2.5-2-1.5-1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5

-0.5

0 x -1

-1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5

-1.5

-0.5 -2

B. D.
 1 y
3 y

0.5
2

0 x
-1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 1

-0.5
0 x
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3

-1
-1

-1.5
-2

-2
-3
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 33
33. Which of the following graphs represents a function?

A. 3 y
C.
3 y

2
2

1
1

0 x
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 0
x
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3

-1
-1

-2
-2

-3
-3
 3 y
5 D.
y
C.
2
4

1
3

0 x
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 2

-1
1

-2
0 x
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3

-3
34. Which of the graphs below best represents the following scenario? Chok was at home when he decided to visit his
friend. After a few hours, he was already at his friends house which is a few kilometers away from his home. He stayed
there for a few hours and went back home.

A. C.

Distance Distance

Time
Time

B. D.

Distance Distance

Time Time
35. Which of the graphs below best represents the following scenario? Avel is running at a steady rate and then comes to
a hill, which causes him to run at a slower rate. Once he reaches the top of the hill, he runs down the hill very fast. Upon
reaching the bottom of the hill, he resumes his original pace.

A. B.

Speed
Speed

Time
Time

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 34

C. D.

Speed Speed

Time Time

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 35

Content Area: MATHEMATICS
Focus: Probability and Statistics
Prepared by: Daisy de Borja-Marcelino
LET Competencies:

Counting Techniques

Experiment: any activity that can be done repeatedly (e.g. tossing a coin, rolling a die).

Sample space: the set of all possible outcomes in an experiment.

Example: In rolling a die, the sample space is S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}.

Sample point: an element of the sample space.

Example: In rolling a die, there are 6 sample points.

Counting Sample Points

Fundamental Principle of Counting (FPC)

If a choice consists of k steps, of which the first can be performed in n 1 ways, for each of these the second can be
performed in n2 ways, for each of these the third can be performed in n 3 ways, and for each of these the kth
can be made in nk ways, then the whole choice can be made in n1n2n3nk ways.
Example: In how many ways can two dice fall? Ans. : 6 6 = 36 ways
Permutation
Permutation is an arrangement of objects wherein the order is important.

Linear Permutation
If n objects are to be arranged r objects at a time, then the number of distinct arrangements is given by
P =
.
nr ( )

Example: In how many ways can the first, second and third winners may be chosen with 10 contestants?
P =
10 3 ( )

b. Circular Permutation
If n objects are to be arranged in a circular manner, then the number of distinct arrangements is (n - 1)!

Example: In how many ways can 6 people be arranged around a circular table?
Answer: (6 - 1)! = 5!

Permutation with Repetitions

The number of permutations of n things of which n1 are one of a kind, n2 second of a kind, , nk of a kth kind is
n!
n1!n2!...nk !
Example: How many different permutations are there in the word WAGAYWAY if all letters are to be taken?
8!
Answer: 2 ! 3 ! 2!
Combination

Combination is the arrangement of objects regardless of order. In other words, the order of arranging the objects is not
important. If n objects are to be arranged r at a time, the number of distinct combinations is given by:
C= .
n r ( )

Example: In how many ways can a committee of 3 be chosen from 7 persons?

7!
Answer: 3 ! 4!
Probability

Probability: the likelihood of occurrence of an event.

If E is any event, then the probability of an event denoted by P(E) has a value between 0 and 1, inclusive. In
symbols,
0 P (E) 1
If P(E) = 1, then E is sure to happen.
If P(E) = 0, then E is impossible to happen.
Moreover, if the probability that E will not happen is P(E), then P (E) + P (E) = 1.

Theoretical Probability
Theoretically, the probability of an event E, denoted by P(E), is defined as
n ( E)
P(E) = n ( S)
where n(E) = number of favorable outcomes

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 36

 n(S) = number of possible outcomes

Exercises

A coin is flipped once.

How many possible outcomes are there?

What are these outcomes?
How many of these outcomes consist of a face facing up?
What is the probability that a tail faces up?
A spinner can land on any of the numbers 1 through 12 with equal likelihood. What is the probability that the spinner
lands on a/an
a. odd number? c. b. number greater than 12? d.
prime number? number divisible by 3 or 4? f.
e. number divisible by 3 and 4? number between 3 and 9?
3. A box contains cards printed with the letters of the word PHILIPPINES, so that P is one 3 cards, H is on one card,
and so on. A card is drawn from the box.
How many possible outcomes are there?
What are these outcomes?
Are these outcomes equally likely?
What is the probability that the card drawn is
i. a P ii. a H
ii. a I iv. not a P

STATISTICS
Statistics is the branch of mathematics used to summarize quantities of data and help investigators draw sound
conclusions. Its two main branches are descriptive statistics and inferential statistics.
A sample is a specified set of measurements or data, which is drawn from a much larger body of measurements
or data called the population.

Kinds of Sampling
Random sampling techniques are used to ensure that every member of the population has an equal chance of being
included in the sample. A random sample is said to be representative of the entire population. The two methods of
random sampling are lottery method and the use of the table of random numbers.
Systematic sampling is a technique which selects every nth element of the population for the sample, with the starting
point determined at random from the first n elements.
Stratified random sampling is a technique of selecting simple random samples from mutually exclusive groupings or strata
of the population.
Graphical Representations of Data
Graphs are used in mathematics to show relationships between sets of numbers. Graphs are useful in the field of
statistics because they can show the relationships in a set of data.
Histogram - a graphical picture of a frequency distribution consisting of a series of vertical columns or rectangles, each
drawn with a base equal to the class interval and a height corresponding to the class frequency. The bars of a histogram
are joined together, that is, there are no spaces between bars.
Bar Chart- uses rectangles or bars to represent discrete classes of data. The length of each bar corresponds to the
frequency or percentage of the given class or category. The categories are in turn placed in either horizontal
Frequency Polygon- a special type of line graph, where each class frequency is plotted directly above the midpoint or class
mark of its class interval and lines are then drawn to connect the points.
Pie Chart- an effective way of presenting categorized (qualitative) distributions, where a circle is divided into sectors - pie-
shaped pieces - which are proportional in size to the corresponding frequencies or percentages.
Pictogram- known as picture graph where picture symbols are used to represent values.
MEASURES OF CENTRAL TENDENCY

A measure of central tendency is a single, central value that summarizes a set of numerical data. It describes a
set of data by locating the middle region of the set.
Measures Definition How to find Advantages Disadvantages
of Central
Tendency
Mean The sum of the data Ungrouped data: A single, unique Not appropriate for
divided by the number of value that is skewed distribution
data =

representative of all as it is affected by

the scores extreme scores or
outliers
Grouped Data:
Stable from group to

group
=

May be used in
further
computations
Median The middle number of Ungrouped data: More stable from Not necessarily
the set when the data are group to group than representative of all
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 37
 arranged in numerical The middle for the the mode scores
order ( )

Appropriate for Unstable from group

skewed distribution to group
Grouped Data:
Cannot be used in
Mdn = L + ( ) further analyses

Mode The number that occurs Ungrouped data: Easy to obtain Not necessarily
most frequently in the The most frequent score representative of all
data scores
Grouped Data:
The class mark of the Cannot be used in
class interval with the further analyses
highest frequency
Example: The scores for five students on a quiz are 40, 20, 30, 25, and 15. To find the mean score for this group of
students, we first find the sum of the scores:

40+20+30+25+15=130

We then divide the sum by 5, the number of scores:

130 26
.
5

Example: Determine the median for the set of scores

82, 81, 80, 87, 20

Solution: We arrange the scores in Example 1 in order fro lowest to highest:

20, 80, 81, 82, 87

The middle number in this arrangement is 81 and it is the median.

Exercises

The mean score on a set of 10 scores is 71. What is the sum of the 10 test scores?

The mean score on a set of 13 score is 77. What is the sum of the 13 test scores?

The mean score on four of a set of five scores is 75. The fifth score is 90. What is the sum of the five scores? What is
the mean of the five scores?

Two sets of data are given. The first set of data has 10 scores with a mean of 70, and the second set of data has 20
scores with a mean of 80. what is the mean for both sets of data combined?

MEASURES OF VARIABILITY

A measure of variation or variability describes how large the differences between the individual scores. The
common measures of variability are range and standard deviation.

Measures Definition How to find Advantages Disadvantages

of Variation

Range The difference between the Ungrouped data: Easy to compute Unstable
highest score and the lowest R = HS - LS
score Gives a unique value Not representative
Grouped Data: of the set of data
Easy to understand
R = Upper Limit of
the Highest Class Not used in further
Interval - Lower computations
Limit of the Lowest
Class Interval
Standard The square root of the Ungrouped data: Most stable Affected by extreme
deviation variance of the set of data scores
S= ( )
Gives a unique value
More difficult to
Grouped Data: Most representative compute and
understand
S=
( )
Used in further
computations

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 38

Exercises

1. On a quiz, the following scores were made in a class of 10 students: 72, 83, 86, 97, 90, 70, 65, 71, 80, 86. For this set of
scores, give the
a. mean b. median
c. mode d. range
e. midrange f. standard deviation

2. Jao, Dhei, Nelfe, Dada and Ched are all in the same statistics class. Their scores for the first two exams in the class are
listed in the accompanying table. The first exam had a mean of 84 and a standard deviation of 6, whereas the second exam
had a mean of 78 and a standard deviation of 4.
__________________________________
Exam 1 Exam 2
__________________________________
Jao 84 78
Dhei 90 74
Nelfe 66 78
Dada 78 70
Ched 84 78
__________________________________

Who improved on the second exam?

Who improved the most on the second exam?
Who did not improve on the second exam?
Considering both exams, who did the poorest?
Who performed the same on both exams?

PRACTICE EXERCISES
1. In a political science survey, voters are classified into six income categories and five education categories. In how many
different ways can a voter be classified?
A. 11 B. 25 C. 30 D. 45
2. The number of permutations of the word probabilities is
A. 13 B. 2!3! C. 13! D. 13!/(2!3!)
3. The number of ways seven visitors can be seated on a round table is
A. 6! B. 7! C. 6!7! D. 6!/2
4. In a certain town, 40% of the people have brown hair, 25% have brown eyes, and 15% have both brown hair and brown
eyes. A person is selected at random from the town. If he has brown eyes, what is the probability that he does not have
brown hair?
A. 3/8 B. 2/5 C. D. none of these
5. A die is tossed. If the number is odd, what is the probability that it is prime?
2 3 2 1
A. 3 B. 4 C. 5 D. 3
6. An accounting professor can assign grades of A, B, C, D, or F to students examinations. In how many ways can the
professor assign grades to three different student examinations?
A. 120 ways B.125 ways C. 25 ways D. 50 ways
7. A bag contains 15 red beads, 30 white beads, 20 blue beads, and 7 black beads. If one of the beads as drawn at random,
what is the probability that it will be white or blue?
25 15 13 17
A. 36 B. 42 C. 40 D. 52
8. A whole number is chosen at random from the whole numbers from 1 to 50. What is the probability that it is an even
square?
A. 0.07 B. 0.06 C. 0.02 D. 0.09
9. A pair of dice is tossed. If the numbers appearing are different, find the probability that the sum is even.

1 2 2
A. 2 B. 3 C. 5 D. none of these
10. If repetitions are not permitted, how many 3 digits number less than 400 can be formed from the digits 2, 3, 5, 6, 7
and 9?
A.30 B.126 C.40 D. 162
11. In how many different ways can a true-false test be answered if there are five items, assuming that the student give an
answer for each item.
2 5
A.5! B.2! C. 5 D. 2
12. There are five musical numbers in a program. The number of ways these numbers can be presented is
5
A. 5 B.5! C. 2 D. 5!/3!2!
13. The numbers of permutations of the word probabilities is
A.13 B. 13! C.2! 3! D. 13!/2!3!

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 39

14. The number of ways seven students can be seated on a round table is
A. 6! B.6! 7! C.7! D. 6! /2
15. How many different signals, each consisting of 6 flags hung in a vertical line, can be formed from 4 identical red flags
and 2 identical blue flags?
A. 6! B. 6 4! C.4! 2! D. 6! 4!2!
16. The probability of getting a black heart is
A.0 B. 1 4 C.1 D. 1 52
17. In a certain town, 40% of the people have brown hair, 25% have brown eyes, and 15% have both brown hair and
brown eyes. A person is selected at random from the town. I he has brown eyes, what is the probability that he does not
have brown hair?
A. 3 8 B.1 2 C. 2 5 D. None of these
For items 18-20: The scores of 10 students in a Math quiz are as follows:

Student A B C D E F G H I J
Score 18 32 10 15 27 18 23 28 29 30

18. What is the median score?

A. 18 B. 20 C. 23 D. 25
19. What is the mode of the scores?
A. 18 B. 20 C. 23 D. 25
20. What is the range of scores?
A. 18 B. 22 C. 23 D. 25
21. Jojo aims to get an average of 90 in 5 unit tests. The results of the first four unit tests are as follows: 89, 92, 86, and 91.
What should his grade in the fifth unit be for his average to be at least 90?
A. 91 B. 92 C. 93 D. 94

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 40

LICENSURE EXAMINATION FOR TEACHERS (LET)

Refresher Course

Content Area: MATHEMATICS

Focus: Calculus
Prepared by: Daisy de Borja-Marcelino
LET Competencies:

Solve for the roots of a given quadratic equation

Solve problems on quadratic equations
Determine an equation given a set of roots which are imaginary/complex numbers
Perform operations involving exponential and logarithmic functions
Solve for the solution set of a given inequality
n
Determine the rth term of the expansion (a + b)
Solve problems involving variations
Determine the number of positive and negative roots of a given polynomial

Equations
An equation that contains at least one variable is called an open sentence. Equations b & c above are examples
of open sentences. In equation b, only -1 makes the sentence true or satisfies the equation. However, more than one
2
number might satisfy an equation. For example, +2 and -2 satisfy the equation x 4 0 . Any number that satisfies an
equation is called a solution or root to the equation. The set of numbers from which you can select replacements for the
variable is called the replacement set. The set of all solutions to an equation is called the solution set to the equation. To
solve an equation means to find all of its solutions.

QUADRATIC EQUATION
2
An equation of the form ax + bx + c = 0 where a 0, a ,b, and c are constants, is a quadratic equation.

ROOTS OF QUADRATIC EQUATIONS

To solve a quadratic equation means to find the value of x (unknown) that will satisfy the given equation. The
values of x that will make the equation true are called the roots or solution of the quadratic equation.

Methods of Finding the Roots of a Quadratic Equation

1. Factoring (Use this method if the quadratic equation is factorable)

2
Example: Determine the roots of x -8x - 15 = 0

Solution: Factoring the left side of the equation,

(x - 5) (x 3) = 0

Equating each factor to zero,

(x - 5) = 0 (x 3) = 0
x=5 x=3
2. Quadratic Formula
4a
The quadratic formula is x
b b2 c
2a

BINOMIAL FORMULA

To obtain the terms of the binomial expansion (a + b)n, we use the binomial formula:

n(n 1)a n 2 b 2 n(n 1)(n 2)a n 3 b 3

...nabn b
n n 1
(a + b)n = a na b 2! 3! 1 n

THE rth TERM OF THE EXPANSION (a + b)n

n(n 1)(n 2)...(n r 2)a n r 1 b r
1
rth term =
(r 1)!

EXPONENTIAL FUNCTIONS

The exponential function f with base b is denoted by f(x) = bx,

where b > 0 , b 1, and x is any real number.
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 41
Properties of f(x) = bx

f has the set of real numbers as its domain.

f has the set of positive real numbers as its range.

f has a graph with a y-intercept of (0,1).
f is a one-to-one function.
f has a graph asymptotic to the x-axis.
f is an increasing function if b>1 and f is a decreasing function if 0<b<1.

An exponential function has a constant base and a variable exponent.

The Natural Exponential Function

x
For all real numbers x, the function defined by f (x) e is called the natural exponential function. Note that e is
an irrational number and its accurate value to eight places is 2.71828183.

EXPONENTIAL EQUATIONS
An equation where the unknown quantity appears in an exponent is called an exponential equation.

SOLVING EXPONENTIAL EQUATIONS

To solve an exponential equation is to find the value of the unknown quantity in the given equation.

LOGARITHMIC FUNCTIONS

For x > 0, b > 0, and b 1, we have y = log a(x) if and

y
only if a = x.
Note:
If the base of the logarithm is not indicated it is understood that the base is 10.
If the base of the logarithm is the number e, then it is called a natural logarithm and it is written as f(x) = ln x.

Properties of f x logb x
f has the set of positive real numbers as its
domain. f has the set of real numbers as its range.
f has a graph with a x-intercept of (1,0).
f is a one-to-one function.
f has a graph asymptotic to the y-axis.
f is an increasing function if b>1 and f is a decreasing function if 0<b<1.

Remarks

Logarithmic functions are the inverse of exponential functions.

We can use the rules of exponents with logarithms.
The two most common logarithms are called common logarithms and natural logarithms. Common logarithms
have a base of 10, and natural logarithms have a base of e.
Equation in exponential form can be rewritten in logarithmic form, and vice versa.

The exponential form of y logb x is by x .

The logarithmic form of by x is y logb x .

2
Example1: The exponential equation 7 = 49 may be written in terms of a logarithmic equation as log 7 (49) = 2.

1 1
-3 3
Example 2: The exponential equation 9 =9 or 729 may be written in terms of a logarithmic equation as log9
1
= -3
729

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 42

Basic Properties of Logarithms

0
Property 1 : loga (1) = 0 because a = 1.

Example 1: In the equation 220 = 1, the base is 22 and the exponent is 0. Remember that a logarithm is an exponent, and
the corresponding logarithmic equation is log22 (1) = 0, where the 0 is the exponent.

2 0 2
Example 2: In the equation = 1, the base is and the exponent is 0. Remember that a logarithm is an exponent,
5 5
and the corresponding logarithmic equation is log 2 1 = 0.
5

1
Property 2: loga (a) = 1 because a = a

Example 3: In the equation 71 = 7, the base is 7, the exponent is 1, and the answer is 7. Since a logarithm is an exponent,
and the corresponding logarithmic equation is log 7 7 = 1

1
Example 4: Use the exponential equation m = m to write a logarithmic equation. If the base m is greater than 0, then
logm (m) = 1.

x x x
Property 3: loga (a) = x because a = a

Example 5: Since 92=92, we may write the logarithmic equation with base 9 as log 9 92 = 2.

2 2 2
Example 6: Since you know that 11 =11 , we may write the logarithmic equation with base 11 as log 1111 = 2.

INEQUALITIES
Any relation expressed using the symbols <, >, > or < is called an inequality.
An absolute inequality is an inequality which is always true. A conditional inequality is one which is true only for
certain values of the variable involved.
4 > 3 is an absolute inequality
x > 3 is a conditional inequality

PROPERTIES OF INEQUALITIES
Let a, b, c, & d be real numbers. The following hold.
1. Trichotomy Property
a > b or a < b or a = b
2. a > b if a - b > 0
a < b if a b < 0
3.
If a> 0 and b> 0, then a + b> 0 and ab>0.
If a < 0 and b < 0, then a+b< 0 and ab> 0

Transitivity

If a < b and b < c then a < c.

5. Addition Property

If a < b and c < d, then a + c < b+ d

6. Multiplication Property

If a < b and c > 0, then ac < bc

If a < b and c < 0, then ac > bc

SOLVING INEQUALITIES

To solve an inequality means to find the value of the unknown that will make the inequality true.

POLYNOMIAL FUNCTION
The function defined by the equation
n n-1 n-2 2
f(x) = a0x +a1x + a 2x + . . .+ an-2x + an-1x + an

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 43

 where n is a nonnegative integer and a0, a1, . . ., an are constants, a0, 0 is a polynomial function in x of degree n.
The zeros or roots of f(x) are the numbers that will make f(x) = 0.

The Number of Positive and Negative Roots of a Polynomial Function

If f(x) is a polynomial function with real coefficients, then the following are true.
The number of positive real zeros of f(x) is either equal to the number of variations in sign in f(x), or to that number
diminished by a positive even integer.

The number of negative real zeros of f(x) is either equal to the number of variations in sign in f(-x), or to that number
diminished by a positive even integer.

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 44

 LICENSURE EXAMINATION FOR TEACHERS (LET)

Refresher Course

Content Area: MATHEMATICS

Focus: ARITHMETIC, NUMBER THEORY AND BUSINESS MATH
Prepared by: Daisy de Borja-Marcelino
Competencies:

Simplifying expressions involving series of operations

Solve problems involving

0 GFC and LCMF

I prime and composite
II divisibility
III inverse and partitive proportions
IV compound interest
V congruence
VI linear Diophantine Equation
Apply Eulers function and theorems, or Fermats theorem in solving problem.

THE NUMBER SYSTEM

Example: Some examples of imaginary numbers are: 25, 49, negative numbers , 3i, -7i.

Example: Simplify: 2 (3 + 2i) 5 (4 6i)

Solution: 2 (3 + 2i) 5 (4 6i) = ( 6 + 4i) (20 30i) = 6 + 4i 20 + 30i = -16 + 34i.

Rational numbers are numbers which can be expressed as quotient of two integers, or can be expressed as fractions in
2
simplest forms. Examples are 8, -3, 3.45, and 3 .
Irrational numbers are numbers which cannot be expressed as fractions in simplest forms. Examples are 3 , 4 7 , , e
3
and 3 .
Set of Natural/Counting numbers: {1, 2, 3, 4, }. This set contains the numbers that we use in counting; also called natural
numbers.
Set of Whole Numbers: { 0 , 1, 2, 3, }. This set is the union of the number zero and the set of counting numbers.

Set of Integers: { , -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, }. This set is the union of the set of counting numbers, their negatives, and zero

THE COUNTING NUMBERS

Divisibility. An integer is divisible by a certain divisor (also an integer) if it can be divided exactly by that divisor. That is, the
remainder is zero after the division process is completed.
To illustrate, the integer 12 is divisible by 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, and 12.

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 45

 To determine whether the integer is divisible by a certain integer or not, you may use the following divisibility
rules.

An integer is divisible by
2 if it ends with 0, 2, 4, 6, or 8. (Examples: 134 or 12 or 12,330 or 4)
3 if the sum of the digits is divisible by 3. (Examples: 132 or 18 or 12,330 or 45)
4 if the last two digits form a number which is divisible by 4. (Examples: 13,412 or 12,332)
5 if it ends with 0 or 5. (Examples: 135 or 10 or 12,330 or 495)
6 if it ends with 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 and the sum of the digits is divisible by 3.(Examples: 134 or 12)
7 if the difference obtained after subtracting twice the last digit from the number formed by the remaining digits is
divisible by 7. (Examples: 14 or 364)
8 if the last three digits form a number which is divisible by 8. (Examples: 24160 or 5328)
9 if the sum of the digits is divisible by 9. (Examples: 9, 432 or 18,504 or 270)
10 if it ends with 0. (Examples: 120 or 7, 890 or 1, 230)
11 if the difference between the sum of the digits on the even powers of 10 and the sum of the digits on the odd
powers of 10 is divisible by 11. (Examples: 2123 or 2816 or 94369 or 36465)
12 if it is both divisible by 3 and 4. (Examples: 413,412 or 112,332)
15 if it is both divisible by 3 and 5. (Examples: 150 or 350)

Remarks: Divisibility rules for two or more relatively prime numbers (GCF is 1) may be combined to serve as a divisibility
rule for their product.

Example: The rules for 3, 4, and 5 may be combined to serve as the rule for their product which is 60 since 3, 4, and 5 are
relatively prime.

Exercises: Put a check mark on the space provided for, if the integer on the first column divides exactly the integer on the
top row.

456 36,720 800,112 456 36,720 800,112

2 10
3 11
4 12
5 14
6 24
7 32
8 45
9 77

Even numbers are whole numbers which can be divided exactly by two whole numbers.

Odd numbers are whole numbers which cannot be divided exactly by two whole numbers.

Example: If n3 is odd, which of the following is true?

I. n is odd II. n2 is odd 2
III. n + 1 is odd

A) II only C) I only
B) I and II only D) I and III only

Example: If x is an odd integer and y is an even integer, which of the following is an odd integer?
2
A. 2x-y C. x + 3y
2
B. x + y - 1 D. x - 1
B. Factors and Multiples. In the number sentence 2 x 3 = 6, the numbers 2 and 3 are called factors, while 6 is their
product. Or we say, 2 and 3 are divisors of 6. Moreover, we say that 6 is a multiple of 2 and 3.

2
Example: How many factors does 4 have?
A) 2 B) 4 c) 5 D) 16
2
Answer: (C). The factors of 4 = 16 are {1, 2, 4, 8, 16}.
Example: What are the multiples of 6?
Answer: The multiples of 12 are {12, 24, 36, 48, }

Exercises Fill in the blanks with either 7 or 42.

______ is a factor of ______.
______ is divisible by ______.
______ is a divisor of ______.
______ is a multiple of ______.
______ divides _______.

C. Prime and Composite Numbers

Prime numbers are counting numbers that have exactly two factors in the set of counting numbers: 1 and itself.

Composite numbers are counting numbers that have more than two factors in the set of counting numbers.
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 46
The numbers 0 and 1 are special numbers. They are neither prime nor composite.

Example: What is the sum of prime numbers less than 15?

A) 4 B) 5 C) 6 D) 14
Answer: The number 2,3,5,7, 11 and 13 are prime number less than 15. Hence, the answer is C.

D. Prime Factorization. This is a process of expressing a number as product of prime factors.

Example: Express 24 as product of prime factors.

Solution: 24= 2 x 2 x 2 x 3 = 23 x 3 or 3 x 23 .

Fundamental Theorem of Arithmetic

Every composite whole numbers can be expressed as the product of primes in exactly one way (the order of the
factors is disregarded).

E. The Greatest Common Factor (GCF)

The GCF of two or more numbers is the largest possible divisor of the given numbers.

Example: Determine the GCF of 12 and 42.

Solution: 24 = 2 x 2 x 3
42 = 2 x 3 x 7
GCF: 2x3=6

Example: What is the greatest integer that can divide the numbers 18, 24 and 36?
Solution: 18= 3 x 3 x 2
24= 3 x 2 x 2 x 2
36= 3 x 3 x 2 x 2
GCF: 3 x 2 = 6

F. Least Common Multiple (LCM). The LCM of two or more numbers is the smallest possible number that can be divided
by the given numbers.
Example: Give the LCM of 20 and 30.
2
Solution: 20 = 2 x 2 x 5 = 2 x 5
30 = 2 x 3 x 5
2
LCM: 2 x 3 x 5 = 60.

Example: What is the smallest integer that can be divided by the numbers 24, 36 and 54?
3
Solution: 24 = 2 x 2 x 2 x 3 = 2 x 3
2
36 = 2 x 2 x 3 x 3 = 2 x
2
3 54 = 2 x 3 x 3 x 3 = 2 x
3 3 3
3 LCM: 2 x 3 = 216
G. Relatively Prime. Two numbers are relatively prime if their GCF is 1. The numbers themselves may not be prime. The
numbers 12 and 49 are relatively prime.

Example: Which of the following pairs are relatively prime to each other?
A)15 and 36 B) 23 and 51 C) 231 and 27 D) 121 and 330

III. INTEGERS

Consecutive integers are two or more integers, written in sequence, in which each integer after the first is 1 more than the
preceding integer.
Examples: 1,2,3,4,5, 6
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

4, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1, 2, 3
x, x+1, x+2, x+3, x+4, x+5

The absolute value of a number x, denoted by x , is the undirected distance between x and 0 on the number line.

5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 47

It is also defined as

x if x 0
x = x if x < 0

Examples:
Evaluate each of the following.
a) 2 = 2 c) 0 = 0

b) 7 = 7 d) 15 = 15

A. Multiplication. The product of two integers with like signs is a positive while the product of two integers with unlike
signs is negative.

Example: (-4) x 7 = (-28) or (-4) (7) = (-28) or (-4) 7 = (-28)

Example: (-8) x (-5) = 40 or (-8) (-5) = 40 or (-8) (-5) = 40

B. Division. The quotient of two integers with like signs is a positive while the quotient of two integers with unlike signs is
negative.

Example: (-72) (-8) = 9

Example: (-123) 3 = - 41

C. Addition. The sum of two integers with like signs is the sum of their absolute values with the common sign prefixed
before it.

The sum of two integers with unlike signs is the difference of their absolute values with the sign of the integer
with the larger absolute value prefixed before the difference.

Example: (-3) + (-23) = (-26)

Example: (-34) + 12 = (-22)

D. Subtraction. Express subtraction statements as addition statements and follow the procedure in addition. (That is,
change the sign of the subtrahend to its opposite, and proceed to addition.)
Example: (-12) (-3) = (-12) + 3 = -9

Exercise: What number should

be added to (-12) to yield 26?
be subtracted from (-2) to yield 5?
be multiplied by (-4) to yield (-36)?
be divided by (-2) to yield 30?
P-E-MDAS. P-E-MDAS stands for Parenthesis-Exponent-Multiplication Division Addition Subtraction.

When two or more operations are involved in a single expression, operations are performed in the order of P-E-
MDAS. That is, we perform first the operation inside the parenthesis (or any grouping symbol), then followed by
determining the power of the number which is raised to a given exponent, then followed by multiplication/division, and
lastly by the addition/subtraction.
Should there be multiplication and division only, perform the operation from left to right.
Should there be addition and subtraction only, perform the operation from left to right.

2
Example: Simplify 20 + 100 ( 5 63 3 + 12)
2
Solution: 20 + 100 ( 5 63 3 + 12)
20 + 100 ( 5 63 9 + 12)
20 + 100 ( 5 7+ 12)
20 + 100 ( (2) + 12)
20 + 100 10
20 + 10
30.

Two bells ring at 5 P.M. For the rest of the day, one bell rings every half hour whereas the other rings every 45 minutes.
When is the first time, on that same day, that both bells ring at the same time again?
a. 6:30 P.M. b. 8:30 P.M. c. 8:45 P.M. d. 9:00 P.M.

2. Which is true?
a. The set of prime factors of 6 is {1,2,3} c. All prime numbers are odd numbers.
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 48
 b. The product of irrational and rational is irrational. d. 3.14 is a rational number.

3. Which of the two-digit numbers below when inserted in the blank will make 38__09 divisible by 3?
a. 98 b. 84 c. 34 d. 60

4. Which of the following number is divisible by 45?

a. 300,000,000,450 b.600,000,000,045 c. 100,200,600,090 d. 400,450,000,000

th th
5. On its anniversary, a certain store offers a free sandwich for every 4 customer and a free softdrink for every 6
customer. After 75 customers, how many had received both free sandwich and softdrink?
a. 30 b. 18 c. 12 d. 6

IV. FRACTIONS

Kinds of Fractions

As to relation between the numerator and the denominator

Proper the numerator is less than the denominator
Improper the numerator is equal to or greater than the denominator

As to relation of the denominators of two or more fractions

a. Similar the denominators are equal. Examples:1 ,3 ,4

5 5 5
b. Dissimilar the denominators are not equal. Examples:
3, 5 , 5
4 8 6

Other classes
3 , 6 , 12
a. Equivalent fractions having the same value. Examples: .
4 8 14
b. Mixed composed of a whole number and a proper fraction . Examples: 23 , 55 .
4 8
Rules involving Zero
Zero numerator and non-zero denominator the value is zero
Zero denominator no value, undefined
Zero value the numerator is zero

A. Multiplication of Fractions. Multiply numerator by numerator and denominator by denominator to get the numerator
and denominator respectively of the product

Example: 12 5 60 or 2 .
25 6 150 5

B. Division of Fractions. Multiply the supposed dividend by the reciprocal of the supposed divisor.
Example: 36 6 36 10 360 = 12 or 2 2 .
25 10 25 6 150 5 5
Exercises: Evaluate the following. a) 2
1 3 2 b) 2
19 5 3
4 5 21 20
c) 2 1 1 7 d) 3 5 1 1
3 18 15 6
D. Changing Dissimilar Fractions to Similar Fractions. Determine the LCM of the denominators. Then with the said LCM as
the denominator, express each fraction to its equivalent.

1 3 5
Example: Express 3 , 4 , 6 to similar fractions.

Solution: 1 4 = 4 , 3 3 = 9 and 5 2 = 10
3 4 12 4 3 12 6 2 12
Therefore, the similar fractions are 4 , 9 and 10 .
12 12 12

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 49

E. Addition of fractions. Convert the fractions to similar fractions. Then add the numerators to obtain the numerator of
the sum and copy the denominator.
1 3 5
Example: Evaluate 3 + 4 + 6 .

Solution: The LCM is 12, so convert the addends to similar fractions with 24 as the
denominator.
1 + 3 + 5 = 4 9 + 10 23 or 1 11 .
3 4 6 12 12 12 12 12

F. Subtraction of Fractions. Convert the fractions to similar fractions. Then subtract the numerators to
obtain the numerator of the difference and copy the denominator.

7 1
Example: What number should be subtracted from 12 to obtain 2 ?

Solution: Let the desired number be x. Then, the equation is given by

7-x= 1 x= 7 -1 = 7 6 = 1.
12 2 12 2 12 12 12

G. Fraction as Part of a Whole

3
Example: What is 4 of 28?
Solution: Let the desired number be m. Then, the equation is given by

M= 3 28 3 28 84 21.
4 4 1 4

Example: What part of 24 is 4?

Solution: Let the desired number be q. Then, the equation is given by
q 24 = 4

q= 4 or 1 .
24 6
H. Simplifying Fractions
A fraction is in simplest form if the numerator and the denominator are relatively prime (their GCF is 1). Thus, to
simplify fractions, multiply by the fraction whose numerator and denominator are the reciprocal of the GCF of the
numerator and the denominator of the given fraction.

Example: The simplest form of 12 is 2 because 12 2 6 2 .

18 3 18 3 6 3

I. Ordering Fractions

Two fractions are equivalent if their cross products are equal. Otherwise, that fraction the numerator of which
was used to get the greater of the two cross products is the larger fraction.

Exercises

1. A 100-m wire is cut into two parts so that one part is of the other. How long is the shorter piece of wire?
a. 120m b. 80m c. 25m d. 20m

2. Luis left pan of a cake on the table. Dada ate of it. What fraction of cake was left?
a. 1/8 b. 3/8 c. d.
21
3. If and n are equivalent fractions, what is the value of n?
39 26
a. 13 b. 14 c. 20 d. 21
5 1
4. Mr. dela Cruz owned 8 of a business. He sold 5 of his share in the business at a cost of P1M. What is the total cost
of the business?
a. P 6M b. P7M c. P 8M d. P 9M
5. Arrange the fractions 5/8, 4/5, 3/4 in increasing order.
a. 5/8, 4/5, 3/4 c. 3/4, 4/5, 5/8
b. 4/5, 3/4, 5/8 d. 4/5, 5/8, 3/4

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 50

6. Which of these fractions has the largest value?
a. 3/5 b. 11/16 c. 7/10 d. 5/8
7. Mark spent his monthly salary as follows: 3/5 for food and allowances, 1/3 for his childs education and house rental.
If his monthly salary is P15, 000, how much would he left at the end of the month?
a. P 1,000 b. P2,000 c. P5,000 d. P 14,000

8. Chedy and Dada run for President for their organization. Chedy got 1/3 of the votes. If Dada got 300 votes, how many
students voted for Chedy?
a. 900 b. 200 c. 150 d. 100

V. DECIMAL NUMBERS

A. The Decimal Numbers and the place value chart

The place value chart

Hundred Thousands
Hundred Thousand

Ten Thousandths
Thousandths
Hundredths
Thousands
Ten Thousand

Hundreds

Tenths
Ones
Tens

100 000 10 000 1 000 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001

The number 0.8 is read as eight tenths and .214 as two hundred fourteen thousandths.
The number 0.8 is equal to .800.
The number 0.8 is greater than 0.214.
Exercise: a) Arrange the following decimal numbers in ascending
order: 0.5, 0.343, 0.142, 0.5254

In 2.3456, what digit is in the thousandths place?

Addition and Subtraction of Decimal Numbers. Addition of decimals is done by writing them in a column so that their
decimal points are aligned. Thus aligned, digits with the same place values would be in the same column, and the addends
(or the minuend and the subtrahend) are added (or subtracted) as if they were whole numbers.
Multiplication of Decimal Numbers. To multiply decimals, multiply the numbers as if they were whole and so place the
decimal point in the result as to have as many decimal places in it as there are in the factors combined.
Division of Decimal Numbers.

To divide a
decimal by a whole number, do as in dividing whole numbers but writing the decimal point directly above that of the
dividend.
number by a decimal, multiply both dividend and divisor by that power of ten such that the divisor becomes the least
whole number, and then proceed as in (i) above.

VI. CONVERSION

A. Fraction to Decimal. Divide the numerator by the denominator.

Exercises: Convert the following to decimal:

3/5 = ______
5/6 = ______
7/8 = ______

Decimal to fraction

a) Terminating multiply the number by a fraction (equal to one) whose numerator and denominator is a multiple of 10
such that the numerator of the product is a whole number.

Example: Convert 0.15 to fraction.

Solution: 0.15 100 = 15 3

100 100 20

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 51

b) Repeating decimal number

Example: Convert 0.5 to fraction

Solution: Let n = 0.5 = 0.5555555.

10 n = 5.5555555.
- n = 0.5555555.
-----------------------------------
9n=5
5
n=9
5
Hence, 0.5 is equal to 9 .

Exercises

1. Jeepney fares are computed as follows: P7.50 for the four kilometers plus P0.50 for every additional kilometer thereof.
How much should Au pay for a ride that covers 10 kilometers?
a. P8.00 b. P9.50 c. P10.00 d. P10.50
2. Which of the following is 0.3 of ?
a. b. c. d.
3. Which of the following is between 3 and 4?
15
a. 5 b. -3.5 c. d. 2
4. Evaluate 14.8 + 3.95 + .003.
a. 5433 b. 753 c. 446 d. 18.753
5. Carmen bought 4 kilograms of rice at P31.45 per kilo and 6 kilograms of salt at P22.35 per kilo. If she gave a P1000 bill
to the cashier, how much change did she get?
a. P8.00 b. P9.50 c. P120.10 d. P740.10
6. Each capsule of a certain commercial vitamins contains 0.6 mg of calcium. In how many pieces of capsules can 22.2 mg
of calcium be distributed?
a. 8 b. 37 c. 50 d. 105
7. Which of the following is equal to 2.4545454545 ?
 5 5 44 44
a. 11 b. 2 11 c. 45 d. 2 45
1 1 1
8. The expression 100 + 1000 + 25 is equal to _____________.
 a. 0.0051 b. 0.006 c. 0.51 d. 0.051
9. Which of these numbers is greater than ?
2
a. .04 b. (1/2) c. 1/8 d. 1/0.04

VII. PERCENT

Per Cent literally meaning per hundred, it is one way of writing fractions in which the denominator which is required
to be 100 is written as %, and read as per cent.
3 75 1
Since 1 = 100% hence = 75%
4 100 4

A. CONVERSION
Percent to Decimal Number. Divide the number by 100%. Note that 100% = 1.

Example: Convert the following to decimal:

a) 35% c) 8.37%
1 1
b) 6 4 % d) 4 %

Solution: a) (35%) 100% = 0.35

(6 %) 100%(6.25%) 100% = .0625
(8.37) 100% = .0837
(1/4%) 100%(0.25%) 100% = .0025

Decimal Numbers to Percent. Multiply the decimal number by 100%. Note that 100% = 1.

Example: Convert the following to percent.

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 52

 a) 0.25 b) 0.143 c) 2.03 d) .005

Solution: a) 0.25 x 100% = 25% b) 0.143 x 100% = 14.3%

c) 2.03 x 100% = 203% d) .005 x 100% = 0.5%

Exercises: Fill in the blanks so that the entries in each row are equal.
Fraction Decimal Percent
A 4/7
B 160%
C 0.95
D 6/11
E %
B. Percentage. Percentage is a percent of a given number. The given number is called the base. The percent is called the
rate.

Formula: Percentage (P) = Base (B) x Rate (R)

Base Percentage and Rate Percentage 100%

Rate Base

Example: What is 50% of 140?

Solution: N = 0.50 x 140 = 70.00 = 70

Example: 36 is 10% of what number?

N 36
Solution: 36 = 0.10 N 360
0.10
Example: 22 is what percent of 88?
Solution: 22 = P 88

P 22 0.25 100% 25%

88
Example: Mr. Ballaran receives a 10% increase in his salary. With the increase, he now receives P22, 000. How
much is his monthly salary before the increase?
Solution: present salary = previous salary + increase
22, 000 = previous salary + (10% of previous salary)
22,000= previous salary (1 + .10)
22 000 1.1 = previous salary
20,000 = previous salary

C. Discount

The discussion on DISCOUNT is very similar with the discussion on PERCENTAGE.

Original Price/ Marked Price/ List price - as the Base
Rate of Discount - as the Rate
Discount - as the Percentage
Selling Price - Original Price minus Discount

Example: A skirt with an original price of P250 is being sold at 40% discount. Find its selling price.

Solution: S.P. = Original price - Discount

= 250 (0.40 x 250)
= 250 - 100
= 150

Example: An item has a selling price of P 210.00. If the selling price is 70% of the original price, what is its original
price?
Solution: Selling price is 70% of the original price
210 = 0.70 O.P.
O.P. = 210 0.70 = 300.
Therefore, the original price is P300.

Example: A shirt is being sold at P 199.95. If its original price is P 430, find the rate of discount.
Solution: Discount = O.P. S.P.
= 430 199.95 = 230.05

Rate of Discount =
230.05 100% 53.5%
430

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 53

Simple Interest
Interest (I) is the amount paid for the use of money or the money earned for depositing the money.
Principal (P) is the money that is borrowed or deposited.
Time (t) is the number of days/months/years for which the money is being borrowed/deposited and interest is calculated.

I = Prt, P= I t= I r = I 100%
Example: Give the rt Pr Pt simple
interest of P10,000 for three years
at 5.5% per year.
Solution: I=Prt
I = (10 000) (.055) (3)
I = P1 100.

Example: Determine the amount of the principal if the interest at 10% per annum after 8 months is
P3,600.

Solution: I=Prt P I = 3600 = 45,000

rt (0.10)(8 /12)

Compound Interest ( Final Amount = P[ 1 + r ]n )

Compound interest is different from simple interest because after the first interest calculation, the interest is added
to the principal, so interest is earned on previous interest in addition to the principal. Compound Interest rates may be given
as annual (1 time a year), semiannual (2 times a year), quarterly (4 times a year), monthly (12 times a year), and daily (365
times a year).
Example: If P500is invested at 8% compounded semiannually, what will the final amount be after three
years? Final Amount = P[ 1 + r ]n = 500[ 1 + (8% / 2)]3 * 2 = 500[ 1 + 0.04 ]6
500[1.27]
635
Exercises

1. John bought a jacket for Php 850.00. If he was given a discount of 15%, what was the original price?
a. P8,500.00 b. P1,000.00 c. P900.00 d.P765.00
2. In a basket, there are 15 santol, 12 balimbing, and 3 durian. What percent of the fruits are durian?
a. 10% b. 12.5% c. 12% d. 15%
3. A certain mobile phone model was sold for P4,000 in 2000. Two years later, the same mobile phone model sold for
P2,800. What was the percent decrease of the price?
a. 15% b. 30% c. 20% d. 35%
4. If is 50% of a larger figure, which of the following is the larger figure?
a. b. c. d.
A senior class of 50 girls and 70 boys sponsored a dance. If 40% of the girls and 50 % of the
boys attended the dance, approximately what percent attended?
a 44 b. 46 c. 42 d. 40
1
6. Which of the following is equal to 2 2 % ?
5
a. 2.5 b. 0.25 c. 2
d. 0.025
Sarahs earning P 9,200 a month will receive a 15% increase next month. How much
will her new salary be?
a. P 10,500 b. P 10,530 c. P 10,580 d. P 10,560
8. How much is 37% of 80% of 24?
a. 7.1 b. 1.92 c. 19.2 d. 71
9. According to the latest survey, 60% of the cancer patients were smokers. If there were 180 smoking cancer patients,
how many cancer patients are there in all?
a. 90 b. 108 c. 240 d. 300
10. Which of the following is 70% of 50?
a. 7 b. 17.5 c. 35 d. 71
11. Twenty four is 12% of what number?
a. 40 b. 150 c. 200 d. 400
12. Thirty six is what percent of 90?
a. 32.4% b. 40% c. 45% d. 76%
13. In a mathematics test of 40 items, Mavic got 90%. How many items did Mavic get?
a. 7 b. 28 c. 36 d. 360
14. Mr. Mabini receives a 10% increase in his salary. With the increase, he now receives P13,200. How much is his
monthly salary before the increase?
a. P12 000 b. P 13, 500 c. 14, 100 d. P14, 520

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 54

15. According to the latest survey, 60% of the cancer patients were smokers. If there were 180 smoking cancer patients,
how many cancer patients are there in all?
a. 70 b. 150 c. 300 d. 360

VIII. RATIO AND PROPORTION

A ratio is a comparison of two or more quantities.
A proportion is a number sentence stating the equivalence of two ratios.

Note that in ratio, we are comparing quantities of the same units and that the ratio is expressed in terms of integers.
Examples: a) The ratio of 12 days to 3 weeks is 12:21 or 4:7.
The ratio of 3 meters to 180 cm is 300:180 or 5:3.
The ratio of 2 hours to 25 minutes is 120:25 or 24:5.
The ratio of 1 to 4 is 1:3.

A. Direct Proportion. As one quantity increases, the other increases also.

Example: Find the value of x if 15:20 = 14 : x.

Solution: Equate the product of the means and the product of the extremes. Then solve for x. Thus,

(15) (n) = (20) (14)

x 2014 = 18.6 or 18 2 .
15 3
Example: A car travels at an average rate of 260 km in 5 hours. How far can it go in 8 hours,
if traveling at the same rate?
Solution: 260 : 5 = x : 8 (5) x = (260) (8)
2608
x = 416.
5
Example: If the ratio of teachers to students in a school is 1 to 18 and there are 360 students, how many teachers are
there?
Solution: Let x be the number of teachers,

1 x
18 360 or 1 : 18 = x : 360
(18)x = (360)1
x = 360/18 = 20 teachers

B. Inverse Proportion. As one quantity increases, the other decreases.

Example: If the food is sufficient to feed 10 flood victims in 15 days, how many days would it last for 8 flood
victims?

Solution: Equate the product of the terms in the first condition to the product of the terms in
the second condition. Thus, we have:

(10 victims)(15 days) = (x) (8 victims)

1015
x = 18.75 days
8
C. Partitive Proportion. One quantity is being partitioned into different proportions.

Example: A wood 120 m long is cut in the ratio 2:3:5. Determine the measure of each part.

Solution:
2 120 = 24 = 24 m
10 1 1

3 120 = 36 = 36 m
10 1 1

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 55

 5 120 60
= = 60 m
10 1 1

Example: A wire is cut into three equal parts. The resulting segments are then cut into 4, 6, and 8 equal parts respectively.
If each of the resulting segments has an integer length, what is the minimum length of the wire?
A) 24 B) 48 C) 72 D) 96

Solution: Each third of the wire is cut into 4,6 and 8 parts respectively, and all the resulting segments have integer lengths.
This means that each third of the wire has a length that is evenly divisible by 4, 6, and 8. The smallest positive integer that
is divisible by 4, 6, and 8 is 24, so each third of the wire has a minimum length of 24. So, the minimum length of the whole
wire is three times 24, or 72.

Exercises
1. A 300 m ribbon is cut into four pieces in the ratio 1:2:3:4. Give the length of the shortest piece.2. If there are 18 boys
and 45 girls in the gym, what is the ratio of the girls to the boys?
a. 2:5 b. 2:3 c. 5:2 d. 3:7
2. What one number can replace x in 2: x = x: 32?
a. 2 b. 6 c. 4 d. 8
3. If 5 men can do a job in 12 days, how long will it take 10 men to complete this task, assuming that they work at the
same rate?
a. 20 days b. 6 days c. 2 days d. 0.06 day
4. If 3 kg of oranges cost as much as 5 kg of chicos, how many kg of oranges would cost as much as 60 kg of chicos?
A. 100 B. 36 C. 7.5 D. 4
5. If 2/5 mm in a map represents 120 km, how many km will be represented by 2 mm?
A. 600 km B. 300 km C. 96 km D. 24 km
6. In a Mathematics Club, the ratio of boys to girls is 3:5. If there are 240 members, how many are girls?
A. 90 B. 144 C. 150 D. 450
A photographer wishes to enlarge a picture 18 cm long and 12 cm wide so that it will be
36 cm wide. How long will the enlarged picture be?
A. 54 cm B. 72 cm C. 24 cm D. 6 cm
8. If 8 secretaries can type 800 pages in 5 hours, how long would it take for 12 secretaries to
type 800 pages at the same rate?
A. 7 1/2 hours B. 3 1/3 hours C. 10 hours D. 2 1/2 hours

THE THEORY OF CONGRUENCES

If a and b are integers, m a positive integer and m (a b), we say that a is congruent to b modulo m. In
th
symbols, we write this as a b (mod m). CONGRUENCE was invented by Karl Friedrich Gauss at the beginning of the 19
century and is a convenient statement about divisibility.

The following are equivalent and may be used interchangeably.

a b (mod m).
m (a b) or (a b) is divisible by m.
a = b + mk, k Z.

Theorem: If a and b are integers and m a positive integer then a b (mod m) if and only if a and b leave the same remainder
upon division by m.

{ }
Let m be a positive integer. A collection of m integers a1 , a2 ,..., an is called a complete residue system modulo m if
every integer b modulo m is congruent to exactly one of the elements in the collection.

Properties of Congruence
Congruence is an equivalence relation in the set of integers; that is, congruence is reflexive, symmetric and transitive with
respect to integers.
In the following, let a, b, c, and d be integers and m a positive integer.
If a b (mod m) then
a+c b+c (mod m).
ac bc (mod m).
ar br (mod m) where r is a positive integer.

If a b (mod m) and c d (mod m), then

a + c (b + d) (mod m).
ac (bd) (mod m).

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 56

 m
If ac bc (mod m), then a b mod where d = (c, m).
d

The following are some applications of congruence.

Finding the units digit (or hundreds digits) of a very large number written in exponential form; and
Finding the remainder when a very large number is divided by another number.

Two of the most prolific mathematicians in Number Theory are Pierre de Fermat and Leonhard Euler.

FERMATS AND EULERS THEOREMS

Theorem 5. (Fermats Little Theorem) Let p be a prime number and a Z . If p does not divide a, then ap
1
1 (mod p) .

Theorem 6. (Fermats Second Theorem). Let p be a prime number and a Z . If p and a are relatively prime, then ap
a (mod p) .

DEFINITION OF (m)

Let m be a positive integer greater than 1. The number of positive integers less than and relatively prime to m is
the value of Eulers totient or function at m and is denoted by (m) .

Remarks: If p is prime, then ( p) = p 1.

Theorem 7. Eulers Theorem: If n is a positive integer and the greatest common divisor of a and n is 1, then
n
a 1mod n.

LINEAR DIOPHANTINE EQUATIONS

An equation in one or more unknowns having integral solutions is called a Diophantine equation, in honor of Diophantus of
Alexandria.

Theorem 8. Given two integers a and b where (a , b) = d. The linear Diophantine equation
ax + by = c has an integral solution if and only if d c.

Theorem 9. If the equation ax + by = c has a solution x = x0 , y = y0, then any other solutions can be expressed in the form
 b
x x0 d t , t Z and

a
y y0 d t , t Z.
Example: To determine the integral solution of 24x + 138y = 18, we note that since (24,138) = 6 and 6 18. Then we know
that it has solution. We now have the following.

138 = 5 (24) + 18
24 = 1 (18) + 6
18 = 6 (3).
Observe that,
= 24 1(18)
24 [138 - 5 (24)]
(-1)(138) + 6(24)

Moreover,
18 = 3(6)
3[(-1)(138) + 6(24)] =(-
3)(138) +(18)(24)

Thus, y0 = -3 and x0 = 18

Hence, the solution of the equation is of the form y = -3+23t and x = 18 4t where t is an integer. There
are problems which can be solved using linear Diophantine equations as working equations.

The following steps may be used in solving word problems which involve linear Diophantine equations in two
unknowns/variables:
Step 1. Represent the unknown values using any two variables.

Step 2. Form the equation using the condition given in the problem.

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 57

 Step 3. Solve the resulting linear Diophantine equation.

Step 4. Determine the solution/s to the problem using the results in step 3.

Theorem: (Wilsons Theorem) If p is a prime, then (p-1)! 1modp.

Exercises

1. Which of the following is true?

A. 34 3mod 5 B. 5
4
5mod 25 C. 308 0mod11 D. 3 4mod15

2. Mavic argues that 15 9mod 6. Is she correct? Why?

A. Yes, because 6 divides 15 - 9. C. No, because 6 does not divide 15 + 9.
B. Yes, because 6 divides 15 + 9. D. No, because 15 9 61.
3. Which of the following is congruent to 11 modulo 13?
A. -7 B. -5 C. -2 D. 4
6
4. Which of the following must be the value of n if n 1 0 mod 7 ?
A. x is divisible by 7 C. x is relatively prime with 7
B. x is prime D. x is any integer greater than 7
105
5. What is the remainder when 5 is divided by 3?
A. 1 B. 2 C. 3 D. 5
100
6. What is the units digit of 3 ?
A. 1 B. 3 C. 5 D. 9

7. What is 12?
A. 1 B.4 C.6 D. 11

SET A Exercises. Choose the letter of the best answer.

1. What is the sum of the first four prime numbers?

a. 11 b. 26 c. 17 d. 28
2. Which of the following is NOT true about the sum of two consecutive positive odd integers?
a. it is even b. it is only divisible by 12
c. it is divisible by 4 d. it is always divisible by 1
3. In a sequence of starts and stops, an elevator travels from the first floor to the fourth floor and then to the second floor.
From there, the elevator travels to the third floor and then to the first floor. If the floors are 3 meters apart, how
far has the elevator traveled?
a. 21 m b. 24 m c. 28 m d. 32 m
4. An orange light blinks every 4 seconds. A blue one blinks every 5 seconds while a red one blinks every 6 seconds. How
many times will they blink together in two hours?
a. once b. 2 times c. 10 times d. 60 times
5. If one prime factor of 84 is 3, what are the other prime factors?
a. 2 and 3 b. 2 and 7 c. 3 and 5 d. 4 and 7

6. A television show reports the following temperature for 5 cities:

Beijing London Chicago Philippines Moscow
0 0 0 0 0
2 C -6 C 0 C 30 C -9 C
Which city is the coldest?
a. Beijing b. Chicago c. London d. Moscow
7. If the sum of a certain number and 7 is divided by 4, the quotient is 3. What is the number?
a. 5 b. 12 c. 15 d. 18
8. Which of the following numbers has the largest value?
a. 22 b. 10 c. 75 d.3
9. Which of the following numbers has the least value?
a. 22 b. 10 c. 75 d.3
10. What is the difference in the elevation between the top of a mountain 51 meters above sea level and a location 28
meters below sea level.
a. 23 m b. 33 m c. 79 m d. 89 m
11. A pack of P50-bills is numbered from RV628 to RV663. What is the total value of the pack of bills, in pesos?
a. 35 b. 36 c. 1750 d. 1800
2 2 3
12. Simplify: [ 5 81 3 5 3 + 2] (4 2 )
a. 15 b. 4 c. -6 d. 15 1/4
13. If each container contains 5 2 kg of flour, how many kg of flour are there in 12 container?
3
b. 68 kg b. 70kg c. 72 kg d. 80 kg

14. Eighteen is 2/3 of what number?

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 58
 a. 6 b. 12 c. 6 d. 27
15. What part of an hour has passed from 2:48 am to 3:20 am?
a. 7/8 b. 1/3 c. 8/15 d. 8/25
16. Clarita spent one-sixth of her money in one store. In the next store, she spent three times as much as she spent in the
first store. If she had 80 pesos left, how much money did she have from the start?
a. 240 pesos b. 252 pesos c. 300 pesos d. 360 pesos
17. Philip has obtained the following grades: 1.4, 1.7, 1.8 and 2.5. What must be his fifth grade so that his average is 1.7?
a. 2.1 b. 1.9 c. 1.5 d. 1.1
18. Out of the 20 numbers, 6 were 2.5s, 4 were 3.25s and the rest were 2.2s. Give the arithmetic mean of the numbers.
a. 2.5 b. 2.65 c. 10 d. 22
19. Ron bought X number of notebooks at P23.00 each, Y pad papers at 18.45 each, and Z ballpens at P8.25 each. If he
gave an amount of P1000 to the cashier, how much change did he receive?
a. P 434.25 c. 1000 [(23.00)(X) + (18.45) (Y) + (8.25) (Z)]
b. P 334.25 d. none of these
20. A bag has a selling price of P60.00. If the selling price is 75% of the original price, what is its original price?
a. P80 b. P120 c. P200 d. P280
21. Mr. de Borja, a store owner, advertises a polo-shirt originally sold for P200 for P170 only. What rate of discount is he
giving?
a. P 30 b. P15 c. 30% d. 15%
22. Ja bought an article for P400 and sold it for P500. What rate of profit did she enjoy in that deal?
a. P100 b. 100% c. 25 % d. 20%
23. The price of an item is increased by 70% and then offered at 40% discount. What happened
to the original price?
a. There is an increase of 30%. c. There is an increase of 2 %.
b. There is an increase of 28%. d. There is a decrease of 32%.
24. How much should Allan invest so that his money earns P2,250 deposited at 6% for 9 months?
a. P 50,000 b. 37,500 c. P 135 d. P 101.25
25. Dan sells a real estate. He receives a monthly salary of P10,000 plus a commission of 1/5 % of his net sales for that
month. Find his gross pay for a month during which his net sale is one million pesos.
a. P 2,000 b. P 12,000 c. P 200,000 d. P 210,000
26. There are 20 million Filipinos who are qualified voters. If 25% of the population are qualified voters, how many are
not qualified voters?
a. 80 million b. 60 million c. 15 million d. 5 million
27. Three cavans of rice for a family of six members last for 5 weeks. At this rate, how many weeks will 4 cavans of rice
last a family of 8 members?
A. 4 B. 5 C. 5 1/3 D. 6
28. If the assembly, ratio of boys to girls is 1:4. What percent of the assembly are the boys?
A. 10% B. 20% C. 25 % D. 80%
30
29. What is the remainder when 11 is divided by 31?
A. 1 B. 2 C. 10 D. 101
2061
30. Which of the following is the remainder when 5 is divided by 7?
A. 1 B. 2 C. 3 D. 6
31. If y is the remainder when 47 is divided by 6, what is the remainder when 19 is divided by y?
A. 1 B. 2 C. 4 D. 5
32. Which of the following is a value of z such that the congruence 3z 1mod13 is NOT true?
A. 9 B. 22 C. 30 D. 48
33. What is the remainder when 18! + 2 is divided by 19?
A. 0 B. 1 C.3 D. 97
34. A certain number of sixes and nines are added to give a sum of 126. If the numbers of sixes and nines are
interchanged, the new sum is 114. How many of each were there after the switch?
A. Ten sixes and 6 nines B. Four sixes and Twelve nines
C. Seven sixes and nine nines D. Six sixes and Ten nines

SET B Exercises. Choose the letter of the best answer.

1. How many prime numbers are less than 37?

a. 9 b. 10 c. 11 d. 12
2. In a series of card games. Marlon starts out with P200 and wins a total of P450. If he later loses P350, wins P60 and
loses P150, how much cash does Marlon have?
a. 0 b. P150 c. P210 d. P300
3. Your score in a game is -6. How many points must you earn to get a score of 10?
a. -6 b 15 c. 16 D. 22
4. Arrange the fractions 5/12, 3/7, 2/5 in decreasing order.
a. 2/5, 5/12, 3/7 c. 3/7, 5/12, 2/5
b. 5/12, 2/5, 3/7 d. 2/5, 3/7, 5/ 12
5. Edwin, Doms and Lon weigh 45 kg. If Edwin and Doms weigh 11 1 kg and 13 3 kg, respectively, what is the weight of
5 4
Lon in kilograms?

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 59

 a. 20
1 b. 24
19 c. 42
9 d. 69
19
20 20 20 20
6.Which of the following should be multiplied to 4
3 so that the product is 57?
4
a. 6 b. 12 c. 6 d. 75
7.Which of the following is a value of m if 15 1mod m?
A. 2 B. 3 C. 23 D. 32
1
8. Alex works on his assignment 3 3 hours a day, what part of the day does he spend doing his assignment?
a. 1/8 b. 1/7 c. 5/36 d. 15/28
9. What value of p will satisfy the equation 0.2 (2p + 1470) = p?
a. 294 b. 490 c. 560 d. 1470
10. A blouse originally priced at P600 is being sold at a discount of 30%. How much would you pay if you buy that blouse?
a. P 30 b. P180 c. P 420 d. P 570
11. A pair of slippers with a selling price of P120 is sold at 40% discount. What is its original
price? a. P 48 b. P72 c. P 200 d. P 300
12. An item is offered at 20% discount. Later, it is offered at 30% discount. If the new selling price is P112, what is the first
original price?
a. P162 b. P200 c. P224 d. P1866.67
13. To have a 25% profit, the vendor should sell the item at P80.00. How much is his profit?
a. P20.00 b. P60.00 c. P16.00 d. P64.00

14. Minda deposited P50,000 in a bank that pays a simple annual interest of 14 1 %. How much
5
money will she have in the bank after five years.
a. P 85,500 b. P35,500 c. P36,250 d. P86,250
The ratio of cows and carabaos in the field is 4:9. If there are 468 cows and carabaos in the
field, how many are carabaos?
A. 52 B. 117 C. 144 D. 324
16. In the class, the ratio of boys to girls is 6:5. If there are 90 girls, how many persons are in the class?
A. 75 B. 108 C. 165 D. 198
17. Edwin painting a wall at 9:00 a.m. and was able to finish painting 3/5 of it at 10:30 a.m. Continuing at this rate, at what
time will he finish?
A. 10:45 a.m. B. 11:30 a.m. C. 11:45 a.m. D. 12:15 a.m.
200
18. What is the remainder when 4 is divided by 15?
A. -1 B. 1 C. 2 D. 4
3x
19. If x is any positive integer, then 2 + 1 is _______ divisible by 8.
A. Always B. Never C. Sometimes D. Equivalently

20. What is 29?

A. 0 B. 1 C. 2 D. 28
50
21. Which of the following is the remainder when 2 1 is divided by 7?
A. 0 B. 2 C. 4 D. 5
22. Which of the following is equivalent to the pair of congruence x 1mod 4 and x 2mod 3?
A. x 1mod12 B. x 2mod12
C. x 3mod12 D. x 5mod12
23. Which of the following is NOT true if a is a positive integer?

A. a divides a5 C. a5 amod10
5 5
B. a divides a 1 . D. a and a have the same units digit
24. Which of the following gives a remainder of 2 when divided by 5 and a remainder of 12 when divided by
13?
A. 22 B.38 C. 77 D. 92
25. What is the remainder upon dividing the sum 2!4!6!... 2008!2010! by 5?
A. 1 B. 2 C. 3 D. 4
109
26. What is the least residue if 17 is a multiple of 6?
A. 1 B. 2 C. 3 D. 5
27. Which of the following has an integral solution?
A. 21x 13mod 77 B. 3x 4mod81
C. 3x 5mod 36 D. 3x 4mod 5
28. How many integral solutions does 18x 21mod 24 have?
A. 2 B. 3 C. 6 D. 10

29. Which of the following has a solution if the variables are positive integers?
A. 5x + 30y = 18 B. 8x + 10y = 15
C. 22x + 4y = 28 D. 101x 37 y 3819

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 60

30. When 16! is divided by 17, the remainder is ______.
A. 0 B. 1 C. 17 D. 18
31. A Johns transcript shows x number of 3-unit courses and y number of 5-unit courses for a total of 64 units. Which of
the following may appear in the transcript?
A. 2 xs and 18 ys B. 13 xs and 5 ys
C. 11 xs and 3 ys D. 9 xs and 8 ys
2
32. Which of the following is a value of x if x
1 mod 8 ?
A. 2 B. 5 C. 6 D. 10
33. When students in a certain college are grouped by 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s or 6s at a time, there remain, 1,2,3,4, or 5 students
respectively. When the students are grouped by 7s, no is student left. What is the smallest possible number of students in
the school?

A. 227 B.1,534 C. 1,379 D. 2,778

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 61

 LICENSURE EXAMINATION FOR TEACHERS (LET)

Refresher Course

Content Area: MATHEMATICS

Focus: Plane and Solid Geometry
Prepared by: Daisy de Borja-Marcelino

Basic Ideas

The undefined terms, point, line, and plane are geometric ideas and they are visually represented by a tiny dot, a
thin wire, and a smooth flat surface, respectively. Points are labeled by means of capital letters, lines by naming any two of
its points, and planes by naming at least three of its points. The subsets of a line are ray, segment, and the line itself.
Space is the set of all points.
.
. . . . . .
A B A B A B
Line Ray Line segment

AB AB AB
Some postulates on points, lines and planes:

The Distance Postulate. To every pair of different points there corresponds a unique positive number.

The Ruler Postulate. The point of a line can be placed in correspondence with the real numbers in such a way that
to every point of the line there corresponds exactly one real number;
to every real number there corresponds exactly one point of the line; and
the distance between any two points is the absolute value of the difference of the corresponding numbers.

The Ruler Placement Postulate. Given two points P and Q of a line, the coordinate system can be chosen in such a way that
the coordinate of P is zero and the coordinate of Q is positive.

The Line Postulate. For every two points there is exactly one line that contains both points.

The Plane Postulate. Any three points lie in at least one plane, and any three noncollinear points lie in exactly one plane.

The Plane Separation Postulate. Given a line and a plane containing it. The points of the plane that do not lie on the line
form two sets such that
each of the sets is convex, and
if P is in one of the sets and Q is in the other, then the segment PQ intersects the line.

The Space Separation Postulate. The points of space that do not lie in a given plane form two sets, such that
each of the sets is convex, and
if P is in one of the sets and Q is in the other, then the segment PQ intersects the plane.

The following are also true.

Every plane contains at least three noncollinear points.
Space contains at least four noncoplanar points.
If two points of a line lie in a plane, then the line lies in the same plane.
If two different planes intersect then, their intersection is a line.

Some theorems on points, lines and planes:

If A,B, and C are three different points of the same line, then exactly one of them is between the other two.

The Point-Plotting Theorem. Let AB be a ray, and let X be a positive number. Then there is exactly one point P of AB
such that AP x .
Every segment has exactly one mid-point.
If two different lines intersect, their intersection contains only one point.
If a line intersects a plane not containing it, then the intersection contains only one point.
Given a line and a point not on the line, there is exactly one plane containing both.
Given two intersecting lines, there is exactly one plane containing both.
The First Minimum Theorem. The shortest segment joining a point to a line is the perpendicular segment.
In a given plane, through a given point of a given line, there is one and only one line perpendicular to the given line.
The Perpendicular Bisector Theorem. The perpendicular bisector of a segment, in a plane, is the set of all points of the
plane that are equidistant from the end points of the segment.

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 62

 Through a given external point there is at least one line perpendicular to a given line.
Through a given external point there is at most one line perpendicular to a given line.
If M is between A and C on a line L, then M and A are on the same side of any other line that contains C. If B
and C are equidistant from P and Q, then every point between B and C is equidistant from p and Q.
If a line is perpendicular to each of two intersecting lines at their point of intersection, then it is perpendicular to the
plane that contains them.
Through a given point of a given line there passes a plane perpendicular to the given line.
If a line and a plane are perpendicular, then the plane contains every line perpendicular to the given line at its point of
intersection with the given plan.
Through a given point of a given line there is only one plane perpendicular to the line.
The Perpendicular Bisecting Plane Theorem. The perpendicular bisecting plane of a segment is the set of all points
equidistant from the end points of the segment.
Two lines perpendicular to the same plane are coplanar.
Through a given point there passes one and only one plane perpendicular to a given line.
Through a given point there passes one and only one line perpendicular to a given plane.
The Second Minimum Theorem. The shortest segment to a plane from an external point is the perpendicular segment.
Two parallel lines lie in exactly one plane.
In a plane two lines are parallel if they are both perpendicular to the same line.
Let L be a line and let P be a point on L. Then there is at least one line through P, parallel to L.

Angle. It is a union of two non-collinear rays that have a common endpoint.

An acute angle measures more than 0o but less than

90o. A right angle measures exactly 90o.
o o
An obtuse angle measures more than 90 but less than 180 .
o
Two angles are complementary if the sum of their measures is 90 .
o
Two angles are supplementary if the sum of their measures is 180 .
Two angles are adjacent if they have a common vertex, common side but no common interior points.
Two angles form a linear pair if they are both adjacent and supplementary.

Some postulates on angles:

The Angle Measurement Postulate. To every angle there corresponds a real number between 0 and 180.

The Angle Construction Postulate. Let AB be a ray on the edge of the half-plane H. for every number r between 0
and 180 there is exactly one ray AP , with P in H, such that m PAB r .
The Angle Addition Postulate. If D is in the interior of BAC , then m BAC m BAD m DAC .
The Supplement Postulate. If two angles form a linear pair, then they are supplementary.

The transversal line is a line intersecting two or more coplanar lines at different points

1 2 Interior angles: 3, 4, 5, 6
3 4 Exterior angles: 1, 2, 7, 8
5 6 Corresponding angles: 1 and 5, 2 and 6
7 8 3 and 7, 4 and 8
Alternate interior angles: 3 and 6, 4 and 5
Alternate exterior angles: 1 and 8, 2 and 7
Same-side interior angles: 3 and 5, 4 and 6

Some theorems on angles and transversal lines:

Given two lines cut by transversal. If a pair of alternate interior angles are congruent, then the lines are parallel.
Given two lines cut by transversal. If a pair of corresponding angles are congruent, then a pair of alternate interior
angles are congruent.
Given two lines cut by transversal. If a pair of corresponding angles are congruent, then the lines are parallel.
Given two lines cut by transversal. If a pair of interior angles on the same side of the transversal are supplementary,
the lines are parallel.
If two parallel lines cut by transversal, each pair of corresponding angles are congruent.
In a plane, if a line intersects one of two parallel lines in only one point, then it intersects the other.
Every right angle has measure 90, and every angle with measure 90 is a right angle.
If two angles are complementary, then both are acute.
Any two right angles are congruent.
If two angles are both congruent and supplementary, then each is a right angle.
The Supplement Theorem. Supplements of congruent angles are congruent.
The Complement Theorem. Complements of congruent angles are congruent.

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 63

The Vertical Angle Theorem. Vertical angles are congruent.
If two intersecting lines form one right angle, then they form four right angles.
The Angle Bisector Theorem. Every angle has exactly one bisector.
The Isosceles Triangle Theorem. If two sides of a triangle are congruent, then the angles opposite these sides are
congruent.
If two angles of a triangle are congruent, then the sides opposite them are congruent.
If M is between B and C, and A is any point not on BC , then M is in the interior of BAC .
The Exterior Angle Theorem. An exterior angle of a triangle is greater than each of its remote interior angles.

Polygon. It is a closed plane figure with three or more sides, consists of segments (sides) that meet only at their endpoints
(vertices) such that every side contains only two vertices, and every vertex is on exactly two sides.

Name of Polygon Number of Exact Sides Name of Polygon Number of Exact sides
Triangle 3 nonagon 9
Quadrilateral 4 decagon 10
Pentagon 5 undecagon 11
Hexagon 6 dodecagon 12
Heptagon 7 pentadecagon 15
Octagon 8

Notes: a) In a triangle, the sum of the lengths of two sides is always greater than the length of the third side.
In a right triangle with legs x, y and hypotenuse z: x2 + y2 = z2 (Pythagorean triple)
o o
The sum of the interior angles of an n-gon is (n-2) 180 . The sum of the interior angles of a triangle is 180 while
o
the sum of the interior angles of a quadrilateral is 360 .
A polygon is equilateral if the measures of all its sides are equal.
A polygon is equiangular if the measures of all its angles are equal.

A polygon is regular if all its sides and angles are correspondingly congruent.

Some postulates on polygons

The SAS Postulate. Every SAS correspondence is a congruence.
The ASA Postulate. Every ASA correspondence is a congruence.
The SSS Postulate. Every SSS correspondence is a congruence.
The Parallel Postulate. Through a given external point there is only one parallel to a given line.
The Area Postulate. To every polygonal region there corresponds a unique positive real number.
The Congruence Postulate. If two triangles are congruent, then the triangular regions determined by them have the
same area.
The Area Addition Postulate. If two polygonal regions intersect only in edges and vertices (or do not intersect at all),
then the area of their union is the sum of their areas.
The Unit Postulate. The area of a square region is the square of the length of its edge.
The Unit Postulate. The volume of a rectangular parallelepiped is the product of the altitude and the area of the base.
The Cavalieris Principle. Given two solids and a plane. Suppose that every plane parallel to the given plane, intersecting
one of the two solids, also intersects the other, and gives cross sections with the same area. Then the two solids have
the same volume.
The SAA Theorem. Every SAA correspondence is a congruence.
The Hypotenuse-Leg Theorem. Given a correspondence between two right triangles, if the hypotenuse and one leg of
one of the triangles are congruent to the corresponding parts of the second triangle, then the correspondence is a
congruence.
If two sides of a triangle are not congruent, then the angles opposite them are not congruent, and the larger angle is
opposite the longer side.
If two angles of a triangle are not congruent, then the sides opposite them are not congruent, and the longer side is
opposite the larger angle.
The Triangle Inequality. The sum of the length of any two sides of a triangle is greater than the length of the third side.
The Hinge Theorem. If two sides of one triangle are congruent, respectively, to two sides of a second triangle, and the
included angle of the first triangle is larger than the included angle of the second, then the third side of the first triangle
is larger than the included angle of the second.
The Converse Hinge Theorem. If two sides of one triangle are congruent respectively to two sides of a second triangle,
and the third side of the first triangle is longer than the third side o the second, then the included angle of the first
triangle is larger than the included angle of the second.
For every triangle, the sum of the measures of the angles is 180.
Each diagonal separates a parallelogram into two congruent triangles.
In a parallelogram, any two opposite sides are congruent.
In a parallelogram, any two opposite angles are congruent.
In a parallelogram, any two consecutive angles are supplementary.
The diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other.

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 64

Exercises

1. Which of the following has a definite length?

A) ray B) line C) angle D) line segment
2. A plane is determined by ______________.
i. a line and a point. ii. two intersecting lines.
iii. any three points. iv. a line and a point not on it.

A) ii only B) iv only C) ii and iii D) ii and iv

3. In angle LON, what is the vertex?
A) L B) O C) N D) cannot be determined

4. These shapes are arranged in a pattern.

Which of these shapes are arranged in the same pattern?

A)

B)

C)

Which of these triangles cannot be isosceles?

A) acute B) right C) obtuse D) scalene

6. Two angles that are complementary _____________________.

i. are each acute. ii. are congruent.
0
iii. have equal measures. iv. have measures that add up to 90 .
A) ii only B) iv only C) ii and iii D) i and iv
7. Refer to the figure on the right. Given: m 1 = 57 and m 3 = 80. What is m 5?
A) 43 B) 63 C) 137 D) 180

8. A quadrilateral MUST be a parallelogram if it has ________________________.

A) one pair of adjacent sides equal B) one pair of parallel sides
C) two pairs of parallel sides C) two adjacent angles equal
9. NCTE is a parallelogram. If m N = 67, then m T = _____.
A) 113 B) 90 C) 67 D) 23
Which two properties of the rhombus do not hold true for other parallelograms?
Diagonals are perpendicular and congruent.
Diagonals are congruent and bisect each other.
Diagonals are perpendicular and bisect each other.
Diagonals are perpendicular and each bisects the angles of the parallelogram.
The supplement of an angle is three times its measure. What is the measure of its supplement?
A) 22.5 B) 45 C) 67.5 D) 135

12. Refer to the figure on the right. If lines r and s are parallel,
which of the following pairs of angles are congruent?

A) 4 and 5 B) 4 and 3 C) 1 and 8 D) 3 and 5

13. The angles of a triangle are in the ratio 2: 3: 5. What is the largest angle?
A) 36 B) 54 C) 90 D) 99
14. An angle measures 65.5. What is the measure of its supplement?
A) 24.5 B) 25. 5 C) 114.5 D) 124.5
15. Which refers to a pair of lines that intersect and form 4 right angles?
A) parallel lines B) perpendicular lines C) intersecting lines D) skew lines
16. Which of the following quadrilaterals best describes a square?
A) Its diagonals are perpendicular to each other. B) It is an equiangular rhombus.
C) Its diagonals are congruent. D) It has four right angles.
17. If ABC is an isosceles triangle with a right angle at B, then

A) is the hypotenuse. B) AC = BC
C) angle BCA measures 45. D) AB = AC a
18. What is the measure of each interior angle of a regular pentagon?
A) 108 B) 140 C) 180 D) 540
19. What is the sum of the measures of the interior angles of a regular heptagon? m t h
A) 1260 B) 1080 C) 900 D) 112.5
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 65
20. In the adjoining figure, if m = 63 and h = 134, then a must be equal to _____.
A) 46 B) 71 C) 109 D) 117

21. Which of the following statements is true about parallel lines?

A) They form a right angle. B) They do not intersect at all.
C) They are skew. D) None of these.
22. In the adjoining figure, the quadrilateral is a parallelogram. What is the value of x?
A) 150 B) 75 C) 60 D) 50

23. Which of the following can be lengths of the sides of a triangle?

A) {3, 4, 9} B) {5, 5, 10} C) {-12, 6, 8} D) {3, 18, 20}
24. The measures of the exterior angles of a triangle are in the ratio 2:3:4. What is the measure of the widest angle?
A) 40 B) 80 C) 160 D) 170
G. Perimeter. The distance around a polygon is called a perimeter. To obtain this, we just add the length of all the sides of
the polygon. In the case of equilateral polygons, we just multiply the length of one side to the number of sides.

Example: Determine the perimeter of a triangle with sides 7, 12, 18.

Solution: P = 7 + 12 + 18 = 37 units.

Exercises: Complete the table below.

Regular Polygon Length of a Side Perimeter

a) square 13 cm
b) 7 cm 56 cm
c) nonagon 54 cm
d) 9 cm 45 cm
e) heptagon 28 cm

Areas of Triangles and Quadrilaterals

triangle = (1/2) (base) (height)

rectangle = (length) (width) or (base) height)
square = (side)(side) or (1/2)(d1)(d2)
parallelogram = (base) height)
rhombus = (1/2)(d1)(d2)
trapezoid = (1/2) (upper base + lower base)(height)

Example: Give the area of a square whose perimeter is 100 m?

2
Solution: Since the perimeter of the square is 100 cm, then each side measures 25 m. Hence, its area is (25 m) =
2
625 m .
Example: Determine the area of a triangle whose base is 10 mm and its altitude is thrice its base.

Solution: A= 1 bh 1 (10) [(3) (10)] 150mm2.

2 2

Example: Give the area of a rectangle whose width is 5 cm and its length exceeds 4 times the width by 3.
Solution: A = lw = [4w + 3] (w)
= [(4)(5) + 3] (5)
= (23) (5) = 115 sq. cm.

Example: Determine the area of the trapezoid whose bases are 6 cm and 10 m, while the altitude is 7 m.

2
Solution: A = (1/2) (b1 + b2) (height) = (1/2) (6 + 10) (7) = 56 m

I. Circle. This is a set of points in a plane, equidistant from a fixed point. The fixed point is
called the center, and the fixed distance is the length of the radius.
Circumference is the distance around the circle. Formula: 2 r
Area is the interior region bounded by the circle. Formula: r2
Terms related to a circle:
Center the fixed point
Radius segment (or distance) drawn from the center to any point on the circle
Chord segment whose endpoints are any two points on the circle

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 66

 Diameter a chord that passes through the center (the longest chord)
Secant a line/ray/segment that cuts the circle in two points
Tangent a line that touches the circle in only one point

Note: The diameter is twice as long as the radius.

Exercises: In the figure on the right, identify the following:

center, radius, chord, diameter, secant, tangent.

Example: Determine the circumference of a circle with radius 10 mm.

Solution: C = 2 r = 2 (3.1416) (10 cm) = 62.832 mm

Example: Give the area of the circle if its circumference is 18 m.

Solution: Since the circumference is 18 cm, then its radius is 9 m. Hence,
2 2 2
A = r = (3.1416) (9m) = 254.4696 or 254.47 m

Exercises

1. Complete the table below.

Radius Diameter Circumference (in ) Area (in )
1. 2 cm
2. 6 dm
3. 50 m
2
4. 36 km
5. 9 m

2. A diameter of a circle is also a ________.

A) radius B) secant C) chord D) tangent
3. Which of the following sets of numbers can be sides of a right triangle?
A. 4, 5, 6 B. 6 , 6 , 2 3 C. 3 , 6 , 3 2 D. 2, 2, 3
4. The length and width of a rectangle are (3x 2) and (2x + 1). What is its perimeter?
2 2
A. 5x-1 B. 10 x - 2 C. 6x x -2 D. 6x x +2

5. The area of a square is 32x. Which of the following could be the value of x?
A. 2 B. 6 C. 3 D. 4
6. If the area of one circle is twice of another circle, what is the ratio of the area in percent of the smaller to larger circle?
A. 70% B. 25% C. 75% D. 50%

J. Volume of Solids. It describes how much space a three dimensional figure occupies.

3
a) cube = (side)
b) rectangular prism = (length)(width)(height) or (area of the base)(height)
c) pyramid = (1/3) (area of the base) (height)

d) sphere = (4/3)( )(radius)3

2
e) cylinder = (radius) (height)
f) cone = (1/3) (radius)2 (height)

Example: What is the volume of a cube whose edge is 4 mm?

Solution: V = (side)3
3
= (4 mm)
3
= 64 mm

Example: The length of a rectangular box is 20 cm. Its width exceeds 1/4 of the length by 5
cm, while the height is 7 cm less than 1/2 of the length. What is its volume?

Solution: Volume = (length)(width)(height)

1 1
= (20 cm) 20cm 5cm 20cm 7cm
4 2
3
= (20 cm) (10 cm) (3 cm) = 600 cm

Example: The area of the base of a pyramid is 48 cm2 while the height is 6 cm. What is its
volume?

Solution: V = (1/3) (area of the base) (height)

2
= (1/3) (48 cm ) (6 cm ) = 96 cu. cm.

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 67

Example: Determine the volume (in ) of a sphere whose diameter is 12 m.
Solution: V = (4/3)( )(radius)3 and since diameter is 12 cm, then the radius is 6 m.
3 3
= (4/3)( )(6 cm) = 288 m

Example: A cone has a base diameter of 32 cm and its height is 3 cm less than 3/4 of the
radius. What is its volume?

2
Solution: V = (1/3) (radius) (height)
1 2 3 16cm
= (16 cm) 3cm

3 4
768 cm3

Lateral and Total Surface Areas of Solids.

Solids Lateral area Total surface area

a) cube 4 s2 6s2
b) rectangular prism (perimeter of the base)x height 2B + ph
c) pyramid 1/2 (perimeter of the base) slant height B + 1/2 p (slant height)
d) sphere None 4r2
e) cylinder (Circumference of the base) (slant height) 2r2 + 2r (slant height)
2
f) cone 1/2 (Circumference of the base) (slant height) r +r (slant height)

Exercise

1. Determine the volume, lateral and surface area of the following: (All units are in cm.) Express your answers in , if
possible.
 edge = 2 mm
length = 10cm, base edge = 10 m
width = 3cm, slant height = 13m
height = 4cm altitude = 12m

radius = 5 radius = 5 radius = 5 slant

height = 12 height = 5
altitude = 4
 Volume (in cm3) Lateral Area (in cm2) Total Surface Area (in cm2)
cube

rectangular prism

square pyramid

sphere

cylinder

cone

PRACTICE EXERCISES

What will happen to the area of a circle if its radius is doubled?

a. The area will be doubled. c. The area will be quadrupled.
b. The area will remain the same. d. The area will be reduced to half.

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 68

 What is the reason for your answer in item number 1?

0 The area of the circle varies directly to the radius.

I The area of the circle varies inversely to the radius.
II The area of the circle varies directly to the square of its radius.
III The area of the circle varies inversely to the square of its radius.
If a side of square measures 5mm, which of the following is its perimeter?
a. 20mm b. 25mm c. 20 mm2 d. 25mm
2

If a square has an area of 144m2, which of the following is the measure of its side?
a. 12mm b. 12cm c. 1,200 cm d. 1.2m
If the base of a triangle measures 20 centimeters and its height measures 1 inch, which of the following is its
area?
a. 20 cm b. 25.4 cm c. 20 cm2 d. 25.4 cm2
A string 1mm long is used to form a shape that would give a maximum area. What shape is it?
a. square b. rectangle c. circle d. parallelogram
If the length of the side of a square is reduced to half, what will happen to its perimeter?
a. It will be tripled. c. It will be doubled.
b. It will remain the same. d. It will be reduced to half.
The area of a new circle is nine times its original area. What made this happen?
a. The radius was tripled. c. The value of was squared.
b. The radius was multiplied by 9. d. The radius was reduced to half.
A regular polygon is inscribed in a circle. Suppose we increase continuously the number of its sides, what do you think
will happen?
The regular polygon with infinitely many sides will never exist.
It is impossible for a regular polygon with infinitely many sides to be inscribed in a circle.
The perimeter of the regular polygon will be greater than the circumference of the circle.
The perimeter of the regular polygon will be approximately equal to the circumference of the circle.
Which of the following is the most reasonable weight of an adult woman?
a. 12 lbs b. 120 lbs c. 1,200 lbs d. 12,000 lbs
11. Which of the following is the nearest approximation of 10 kilometers?
a. 5 miles b. 10miles c. 16 miles d. 20 miles
Consider a rectangle with a fixed perimeter. Assume that we allow continuous variations of either its width of length.
Which of the following is NOT possible?
The area of the new rectangle will be greater than the original area.
The area of the new rectangle will be smaller than the original area.
The area of the original rectangle will be equal to the area of all new rectangles that can be formed.
The area of the original rectangle will be equal to the area of some new rectangles that can be formed.
What is the reason for your answer in item number 12?
Rectangles possibly have the same perimeter but of different area.
Rectangles with the same perimeter always have the same area.
If rectangles have larger perimeter, then their area is wide.
If rectangles have small perimeter, then their area is small.
A largest circle is to be made out of a square having sides of 20 cm. Approximate the materials that will be wasted.
a. 400.00 sq. cm b. 314.00 sq. cm c. 86.00 sq. cm d. 22.80 sq. cm
A circle with radius 12 cm and a rectangle with width 16 cm have equal areas. Which of the following is the
approximation of the length of the rectangle?
a. 4.19 cm b. 9.00 cm c. 4.71 cm d. 28.26 cm
2. One hectare is equivalent to 10,000 square meters. How many hectares are in a rectangular field which is 750 m
wide and 800 m long?
A. 120 B. 56 C. 60 D. 40
17. An aquarium is 40 cm high. Its length is twice its height, while its width is half its height. How much water is
needed to fill in the aquarium in cu. cm.?
A. 64,000 B. 32,000 C. 16,000 D. 8,000
18. What is the volume of a cube if one face has a perimeter of 36 cm?
A. 729 cu. cm. B. 216 cu. cm. C. 46,656 cu. cm D. 5,832 cu. cm
19. How much water can be filled with a cone whose diameter is 24 cm and whose height exceeds 2/3 of the radius
by 2 cm?
A. 480 cu. cm. B. 540 cu. cm. C. 660 cu. cm. D. 900 cu. cm.
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 69
 LICENSURE EXAMINATION FOR TEACHERS (LET)

Refresher Course

Content Area: MATHEMATICS

Focus: Algebra
Prepared by: Daisy de Borja-Marcelino
LET Competencies:

Solve for the roots of a given quadratic equation

Solve problems on quadratic equations
Determine an equation given a set of roots which are imaginary/complex numbers
Perform operations involving exponential and logarithmic functions
Solve for the solution set of a given inequality
Determine the rth term of the expansion (a +
b)n Solve problems involving variations
Determine the number of positive and negative roots of a given polynomial

Equations

An equation that contains at least one variable is called an open sentence. Equations b & c above are examples
of open sentences. In equation b, only -1 makes the sentence true or satisfies the equation. However, more than one
2
number might satisfy an equation. For example, +2 and -2 satisfy the equation x 4 0 . Any number that satisfies an
equation is called a solution or root to the equation. The set of numbers from which you can select replacements for the
variable is called the replacement set. The set of all solutions to an equation is called the solution set to the equation. To
solve an equation means to find all of its solutions.

QUADRATIC EQUATION
An equation of the form ax2 + bx + c = 0 where a 0, a ,b, and c are constants, is a quadratic equation.

ROOTS OF QUADRATIC EQUATIONS

To solve a quadratic equation means to find the value of x (unknown) that will satisfy the given equation. The
values of x that will make the equation true are called the roots or solution of the quadratic equation.

Methods of Finding the Roots of a Quadratic Equation

1. Factoring (Use this method if the quadratic equation is factorable)

Example: Determine the roots of x2 -8x - 15 = 0

Solution: Factoring the left side of the equation,

(x - 5) (x 3) = 0

Equating each factor to zero,

(x - 5) = 0 (x 3) = 0
x=5 x=3
2. Quadratic Formula

The quadratic formula is x b b 2 4ac

2a

BINOMIAL FORMULA

n
To obtain the terms of the binomial expansion (a + b) , we use the binomial formula:

n(n 1)a n 2 b 2 n(n 1)(n 2)a n 3 b 3

...nabn b
n n n
(a + b) = a na 1 b 2! 3! 1 n
n
THE rth TERM OF THE EXPANSION (a + b)
n(n 1)(n 2)...(n r 2)a n r 1 b r
1
rth term =
(r 1)!

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 70

EXPONENTIAL FUNCTIONS

The exponential function f with base b is denoted by f(x) =

bx, where b > 0 , b 1, and x is any real number.

Properties of f(x) = bx

f has the set of real numbers as its domain.

f has the set of positive real numbers as its range.

f has a graph with a y-intercept of (0,1).
f is a one-to-one function.
f has a graph asymptotic to the x-axis.
f is an increasing function if b>1 and f is a decreasing function if 0<b<1.

An exponential function has a constant base and a variable exponent.

The Natural Exponential Function

x
For all real numbers x, the function defined by f (x) e is called the natural exponential function. Note that e is
an irrational number and its accurate value to eight places is 2.71828183.

EXPONENTIAL EQUATIONS
An equation where the unknown quantity appears in an exponent is called an exponential equation.

SOLVING EXPONENTIAL EQUATIONS

To solve an exponential equation is to find the value of the unknown quantity in the given equation.

LOGARITHMIC FUNCTIONS

For x > 0, b > 0, and b 1, we have y = log a(x) if and

y
only if a = x.
Note:
If the base of the logarithm is not indicated it is understood that the base is 10.
If the base of the logarithm is the number e, then it is called a natural logarithm and it is written as f(x) = ln x.

Properties of f x logb x
f has the set of positive real numbers as its
domain. f has the set of real numbers as its range.
f has a graph with a x-intercept of (1,0).
f is a one-to-one function.
f has a graph asymptotic to the y-axis.
f is an increasing function if b>1 and f is a decreasing function if 0<b<1.

Remarks

Logarithmic functions are the inverse of exponential functions.

We can use the rules of exponents with logarithms.
The two most common logarithms are called common logarithms and natural logarithms. Common logarithms
have a base of 10, and natural logarithms have a base of e.
Equation in exponential form can be rewritten in logarithmic form, and vice versa.

The exponential form of y logb x is by x .

The logarithmic form of by x is y logb x .

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 71

Example1: The exponential equation 72 = 49 may be written in terms of a logarithmic equation as log 7 (49) = 2.

1 1
-3 3
Example 2: The exponential equation 9 = 9 or 729 may be written in terms of a logarithmic equation as log 9
1
= -3
729

Basic Properties of Logarithms

0
Property 1 : loga (1) = 0 because a = 1.

0
Example 1: In the equation 22 = 1, the base is 22 and the exponent is 0. Remember that a logarithm is an exponent, and
the corresponding logarithmic equation is log22 (1) = 0, where the 0 is the exponent.

2 0 2
Example 2: In the equation = 1, the base is and the exponent is 0. Remember that a logarithm is an exponent,
5 5
and the corresponding logarithmic equation is log 2 1 = 0.
5

1
Property 2: loga (a) = 1 because a = a

1
Example 3: In the equation 7 = 7, the base is 7, the exponent is 1, and the answer is 7. Since a logarithm is an exponent,
and the corresponding logarithmic equation is log 7 7 = 1

Example 4: Use the exponential equation m1 = m to write a logarithmic equation. If the base m is greater than 0, then
logm (m) = 1.

x x x
Property 3: loga (a) = x because a = a

2 2 2
Example 5: Since 9 =9 , we may write the logarithmic equation with base 9 as log 9 9 = 2.

Example 6: Since you know that 112=112, we may write the logarithmic equation with base 11 as log 11112 = 2.

INEQUALITIES
Any relation expressed using the symbols <, >, > or < is called an inequality.
An absolute inequality is an inequality which is always true. A conditional inequality is one which is true only for
certain values of the variable involved.
4 > 3 is an absolute inequality
x > 3 is a conditional inequality

PROPERTIES OF INEQUALITIES
Let a, b, c, & d be real numbers. The following hold.
1. Trichotomy Property
a > b or a < b or a = b

a > b if a - b > 0 a <

b if a b < 0
3.
If a> 0 and b> 0, then a + b> 0 and ab>0.
If a < 0 and b < 0, then a+b< 0 and ab> 0

Transitivity

If a < b and b < c then a < c.

5. Addition Property

If a < b and c < d, then a + c < b+ d

6. Multiplication Property

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 72

 If a < b and c > 0, then ac < bc
If a < b and c < 0, then ac > bc
SOLVING INEQUALITIES

To solve an inequality means to find the value of the unknown that will make the inequality true.

POLYNOMIAL FUNCTION
The function defined by the equation
f(x) = a0xn +a1xn-1 + a2xn-2 + . . .+ an-2x2 + an-1x + an
where n is a nonnegative integer and a0, a1, . . ., an are constants, a0, 0 is a polynomial function in x of degree n.
The zeros or roots of f(x) are the numbers that will make f(x) = 0.

The Number of Positive and Negative Roots of a Polynomial Function

If f(x) is a polynomial function with real coefficients, then the following are true.
The number of positive real zeros of f(x) is either equal to the number of variations in sign in f(x), or to that number
diminished by a positive even integer.

The number of negative real zeros of f(x) is either equal to the number of variations in sign in f(-x), or to that number
diminished by a positive even integer.
LICENSURE EXAMINATION FOR TEACHERS (LET)

Refresher Course

Majorship: MATHEMATICS
Prepared by: Daisy de Borja-Marcelino
FOCUS: Mathematical Investigation and Problem Solving
LET COMPETENCIES:
Cite differences between problem solving and mathematical investigations.
State patterns observed as conjectures.
Solve non-routine problems.

CONTENT UPDATE
I. Problem Solving

Problem solving is defined as a set of actions to be done to perform the task or to solve the problem. It is a process of
applying acquired knowledge to a new or unfamiliar situation.

Polyas Problem-Solving Principles

Understand the problem

Understanding the given problem is a very important principle in order to solve it correctly.
The following questions may be helpful in the analysis of a given problem:
Do you understand all the words used in stating the problem?
What are you asked to find or show?
Can you restate the problem in your own words?
Could you work out some numerical examples that would help make the problem clear?
Could you think of a picture or diagram that might help you understand the problem?
Is there enough information to enable you to find a
solution? Is there extraneous information?
What do you really need to know to find a solution? Is
there yet another way to state the problem?
What does key word really mean?

Devise a plan

The following strategies may be of great help as you learn the art of problem solving.
guess and check make a table
make an orderly list use a variable
draw a diagram work backward
look for a pattern eliminate possibilities

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 73

3. Carry out the plan

To carry out the plan you devised earlier be careful and be patient to make it work. If it doesnt work after several
trials, then discard it and try a new strategy.

4. Look back

Looking back is an important step in developing problem-solving skills. Once you have solved the problem make it
a habit to go over your solution and polish it.

II. Mathematical Investigation

A mathematical investigation of a problem or of an open-ended situation is a sustained exploration of

the problem or situation.

Stages in a Mathematical Investigation

Getting Started
Attaining familiarity with the situation to be investigated.
Producing instances, maybe starting from the simplest or whatever is interesting.
Deciding on what is worth pursuing.
Exploring Systematically
Systematic listing/ drawing;
Organizing relationships in tables or graphs; and
Looking for a pattern or relationship.

Making Conjecture
Making general statements about patterns or relationships observed in the cases considered.

A conjecture is a generalization obtained inductively, which has not been validated or proven true.

Testing/ Verifying Conjectures

Checking consistency of conjectures using existing cases;
Predicting results for untried cases for which data are available.

Explaining/ Justifying Conjectures - Explaining why the conjectures made will work for new or all cases

Reorganizing
Simplifying/ generalizing the approach
Seeing the connection among the conjectures

Elaborating - Extending the investigation by considering other aspects of the investigation

Summarizing - Involves an account or summary, written or oral, of what has been obtained in stages 2 7, with some
reference on the experiences in stage 1.

MAJORSHIP: MODERN GEOMETRY

LET COMPETENCIES:

Give characteristics of non-Euclidean geometry which are not found in Plane Euclidean Geometry.
Define and illustrate concepts in linear algebra
Apply properties of matrices in performing matrix operations
Evaluate determinants
Perform modular clock arithmetic

MODERN GEOMETRY

Non-Euclidean geometry
Non-Euclidean Geometry is any geometry that is different from Euclidean geometry. The two most common non-Euclidean
geometries are elliptic geometry and hyperbolic geometry.
A. Hyperbolic Geometry

Hyperbolic geometry is known as saddle geometry or Lobachevskian geometry. It differs in many ways from Euclidean
geometry, often leading to quite counter-intuitive results. Some of the remarkable consequences of this geometry's
unique fifth postulate include: Moreover, in this field, more than one distinct line through a particular point will not
intersect another given line..

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 74

The sum of the three interior angles of a triangle is strictly less than 180. Moreover, the angle sums of two distinct
triangles are not necessarily the same.

Two triangles with the same interior angles have the same area.

B. Elliptic Geometry

In Elliptic geometry there are no lines that will not intersect,

Some theorems in Elliptic Geometry

o
The angle sum of any triangle is more than 180 .

Given two lines perpendicular to line CG. By the parallel postulate for elliptic geometry, these two lines meet at a
point A. Then every line through A is perpendicular to line CG.

Projective Geometry

Projective geometry is the most general and least restrictive in the hierarchy of fundamental geometries. It is an
intrinsically non-metric geometry, whose facts are independent of any metric structure. Under the projective
transformations, the incidence structure and the cross-ratio are preserved. In particular, it formalizes one of the central
principles of perspective art: that parallel lines meet at a point called an ideal point. Consequently, the five initial axioms in
Euclidean Geometry resulted to the following axioms.

Any two distinct points determine one and only one line.
Any two distinct coplanar lines intersect in one and only one point.
Any line not in a given plane intersects the plane in one and only one point.
Any two distinct planes intersect in one and only one line.
Any three noncollinear points, also any line and a point not on the line, determine one and only one plane.

MATRICES AND MATRIX OPERATIONS

Definition

A matrix is defined as a rectangular array of elements. The entries, also called elements, may be real, complex or
functions. If the arrangement has m rows and n columns, then the matrix is of order m x n (read as m by n). A matrix is
enclosed by a pair of parameters such as ( ) or [ ]. It is denoted by a capital letter.

a a a
11 12 1n
a21 a a
A 22 2n

a ij

a a a
m1 m2 mn

A = [ aij ]

TYPES OF MATRICES

1. The ROW MATRIX: This matrix has only one row.

Example: [1 6 4 3] This is a 1 X 4 row matrix

2. The COLUMN MATRIX: This matrix has only one column.

10

2
Example: 7 This is 4 x 1 column matrix
8

3. The RECTANGULAR MATRIX: This has two or more rows with two or more columns.

Example
2 3 5 2
This is a 2 X 4 matrix, because it contains two rows and four
0
8 1 4
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 75
 8 11 22 0
7 6 95 10 This is a 3 X 4 matrix
0 45 49 68

The SQUARE MATRIX: This is a special case of a Rectangular Matrix; here the
number of rows is equal to the number of columns.
1 3 2 4
a b c
5
Example: A = d e f B= 1 3 1
8 1 1 1
g h i

8 5 3 1
Here A and B are square matrices of order 3 and 4 respectively

The DIAGONAL MATRIX: This is a square matrix where all its non-diagonal elements are 0
Example:
5 0 0 0
8 0 0
92 0 0 6 0 0
(a) (b) 0 1 0 (c)
0 1 0 0 0 3 0
0 8
0
0 0 10
These are diagonal matrices of order 2, 3 and 4 respectively.

6. The SCALAR MATRIX: This is a diagonal matrix where all the elements on its leading diagonal to bottom right are of
equal value.
Example:
6 0 0 0
3 0 0
2 0 0 6 0 0
(a) (b) 0 3 0 (c)
0 2 0 0 0 6 0
0 3
0 6
0 0
7. The IDENTITY MATRIX: This is a scalar matrix where the elements on its leading diagonal (the diagonal running from
top left to bottom right) are 1 and the rest are of value 0
Example:
1 0 0 0

0 1 0 0
0 0 1 This is an identity matrix I4 of order 4.
0
0 1
0 0
PROPERTIES OF MATRIX ADDITION

Theorem Let A, B, C, and D be matrices of the same size, m x n.

1. A + B = B + A (Commutativity)

2. A + (B + C) = (A + B ) + C (Associativity)

There is a unique m x n matrix O such that A+ 0 = A for any m x n matrix A. The matrix O is called the m x n
additive identity or zero matrix.

To each m x n matrix A, there is a unique m x n matrix D such that

A+D=0

We write D as (- A), so that A + D = 0 can be written as A + (-A) = 0. The matrix (-A) is called the additive inverse or negative
of A.

PROPERTIES OF MATRIX MULTIPLICATION

Theorem Let A, B, and C be matrices of the appropriate sizes.

1. A(BC) = (AB)C (Associativity)

2. A(B + C) = AB + AC (Right Distributivity)

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 76

 3. (A + B)C = AC + BC (Left Distributivity)

PROPERTIES OF MULTIPLICATION BY A SCALAR

Theorem Let A and B be matrices of the appropriate sizes, and let r and s be scalars.

r(sA) = (rs)A (Associativity)

(r + s)A = rA + sA (Distributivity I)

r(A + B) = rA + rB (Distributivity II)

A(rB) = r(AB) = (rA)B

Definition Let A = [ai j ] be an n x n matrix. We define the determinant of A (written det(A) or A ) by

det A = A =( )a a ...a
1 j1 2 j2 n jn

where the summation ranges over all permutations j1 j2 jn of the set S = {1,2,n}.The sign is taken as +
or according to whether the permutation j1 j2jn is even or odd.

Second-order Determinant

b
If A is the square matrix of order two a1
1
then the determinant of A, denoted by
a
2 b2

either det A or a1 b1 ,is defined by a1 b1 = a1b2 a2b1

a2 b2 a2 b2

Example:
Compute the determinant:

PROPERTIES OF DETERMINANT

The determinant of a matrix and its transpose are equal, that is, det(AT ) = det(A).

If two rows (columns) of A are equal, then det (A) = 0

If a row (column) of A consists entirely of zeros, then det (A) = 0

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 77

The determinant of a diagonal matrix is the product of the entries on its main diagonal.

If matrix A = [ai j] is upper (lower) triangular, then det (A) =a11a22ann; that is
The determinant of a triangular matrix is the product of the elements on the main diagonal.

If a multiple of one row of A is added to another row to produce a matrix B,

then det B = det A.

If two rows of A are interchanged to produce B, then det B = - det A.

If one row of A is multiplied by k to produce B, then det B = k det A.

The determinant of a product of two matrices is the product of their determinants; That is, det(A B) = det(A) det(B)

MODULAR CLOCK ARTITHMETIC

Clock (or modular) arithmetic is arithmetic you do on a clock instead of a number line. On a 12-hour clock, there are only
twelve numbers in the whole number system. However, every number has lots of different names. For example, the
number before 1 is 0, so 12 = 0 on a 12-hour clock

In clock arithmetic, you can add, subtract, and multiply, you can divide by some numbers.

Addition and Subtraction

Addition and subtraction work the same as on number line. For example, to add 9 and 7, start at 0, count 9 along the line,
and then count 7 more. You are at 16.If you count on a 12-hour clock, you will be at 4.

To add negative numbers, use the minus (-) sign to change direction. To subtract on a clock, first find standard (positive)
names for the two numbers, count clockwise for the first one, and count counter clockwise for the second.

In ordinary arithmetic, the additive inverse of 4 is -4. In mod 12 arithmetic, the additive inverse of 4 is 8. In
either system, the sum of a number and its additive inverse is zero.
Rows corresponding to additive inverses are opposites of one another, save for the number 0.

Addition Mod 12 ( 12- hour clock)

St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 78

 13 The educational theory, in response to
St. Louis Review Center, Inc. progressivism, which concerns with the revival of
RD
3 Flr. La Suerte Bldg., Rizal Ave., San effort in the direction of teaching the fundamental
Pablo City tools of learning as the most indispensable type of
Tel. no. (049) 562-2239/0929-688-4348 education
a. Essentialism c. Philosophical analysis
POST TEST SOCIAL SCIENCES b. Perennialism d. Social traditionalism
This philosophy believes that the schools should
L.E.T APRIL 2010 originate policies and progress which would bring
about reform of the social order
1 What branch of philosophy is closely related to a. reconstructionism c.
education because it is concerned with human Existentialism
knowledge in general and the criteria of truth? b. Progressivism d.
a. Metaphysics c. Epistemology Perennialism
b. Logic d. Ethics This is the logical conclusion if we are to apply the
This is the philosophical study of the universe and philosophy of martin Buber to education
everything in it Education will be characterize by imposition and
a. Cosmology c. Metaphysics rules
b. Ethics d. Axiology Education will be characterize by mutual unfolding
What philosophy posits that a social teacher is a revered of persons
person, central to the educative process and Education will be characterize by pretensions
therefore must be excellent mentally and Education will be characterize by self motivation
morally in personally conduct and conviction? Man as an embodied spirit means
a. Realism c. Essentialism Man is a body and soul
b. Idealism d. Progressivism Man is a rational animal
What would the aim of a realist education likely be? Man is a totally, unique core or center, source
Contribute to the development of mind and self wellspring of initiative and meaning
Provide students with the knowledge he will need Man is subjective
to survive in the natural world Man as an embodied sprit implies that education should
Give students insights into their traditions and Develop the intellect / mind
adapting students to society Develop mans individuality
Meet the need of a growing child rather than Develop essential physical and intellectual skills
emphasize the subject matter Develop the total man
This philosophy emphasizes the teaching of controversial human beings are living in a human world implies that
issues to prepare students for a
Education must help man give meaning to his world
progressive structuring of the social order of others
a. Progressivism c. Reconstructionism
Education must develop skills to survive in this
b. Social traditionalism d. Social Experimentalism world
6 The philosophy whose criterion of truth is seeing Education must be relevant to this world
is believing
Education must be in the context of societal needs
a. Essentialism c. Progressivism
This philosophy contends that the intellectual
b. Native realism d. Existentialism
faculty of man is higher that the physical faculties
7 This is the systematic consistent explanation of all
a. Idealism c. Existentialism
the facts of experience. Its technical term is reason
b. Realism d. Logical Positivism
which is considered as the best criterion of truth
The philosophical study of the essence and nature of
a. Pragmatism c. Correspondence
man
b. Consistency d. Coherence Rational psychology
This philosophy contends that truth is universal an Epistemology
unchanging and therefore a good education is also
Philosophy of human person
universal and constant Social Philosophy
a. Perennialism c. Existentialism
The branch of philosophy that studies the morality of
b. Progressivism d. Essentialism human acts
Which philosophy has for its curriculum a body a. Aesthetics c. Ethics
intellectual subject matter that are conceptual on b. Cosmology d. Theodicy
subject, essential for the realization of mental and
This is the philosophical study of human knowledge and
moral development? the criteria of truth
a. Realism c. Existentialism a. Axiology c. Logic
b. Idealism d. Pragmatism b. Epistemology d. Metaphysics
10 A branch of Philosophy that studies the morality of
23 This contemporary philosophical theme in
human action
education contends that education must involve in
a. Epistemology c. Ethics
its processes the total human being-his subjectivity,
b. Metaphysics d. Cosmology the rational, the material and the emotional aspect
The area of Philosophy that specifically deals with the for man is a unity and not a duality
problem of human values Genuine dialogue
a. criteriology c. Theodicy Man as a being in the world
b. Epistemology d. Axiology Man as an embodied spirit
The aim of this philosophy is to reduce statements about The socials and the inter human being
education to empirical terms
Reconstructionism c.Philosophical analysis
b. Existentialism d. Social
traditionalism
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 79
This philosophy proclaims the spiritual nature and the It is a systematic consistent explanation of all the facts of
universe. It holds that the good, the true and the experience. Its technical name is reason. This is
beautiful are permanently part of the structure believed to be the ultimate criterion of truth
of an unchanging universe a. Coherence c. Nave Realism
a. Existentialism c. Materialism b. Consistency d. Pragmatism
b. Idealism d. Realism 37 This educational philosophy encourages
This philosophy posits the know ability of the world and accumulation of knowledge and thinking and must
everything in its as they are in themselves and apply criteria for moral evaluation. Suggested
their existence independent of human mind methods are questioning and discussion, lecture
a. Existentialism c. Materialism and the project, whether done singly or in group
b. Idealism d. Realism a. Existentialism c. Materialism
26 The central aim of education should be to develop b. Idealism d. Pragmatism
the power of thought this would likely be the aim This theory views education as a recurring process based
of what educational practitioner? on eternal truths; thus, the schools curriculum
a. Existentialism c. Progressivist should emphasize the recurrent themes of human
b. Perennialist d. Reconstructivist life
This educational theory is based on the philosophy a. Perennialism c. Progressivism
grounded on experience and the interaction of the b. Pragmatism d. Reconstructionism
person with his environment. It posits that 39 The philosophical study of human mind
education must use past experiences to direct Axiology c. Metaphysics
future experiences b. Epistemology d. Rational psychology
a. Existentialism c. Realism The philosophical study of being, its nature and essence
b. Idealism d. progressivism a. Axiology c. Metaphysics
This philosophy is a way of viewing and thinking about b. Epistemology d. Rational
life in the world so that priority is given into Psychology
individualism and subjectivity. It believes that A sociologist would be most interested in studying
human beings are the creator of their own Artifacts of the fast civilization
experiences Group behavior
a. Existentialism c. Realism Psychological problems
b. Idealism d. Reconstruction Economic institution
This emerging social values in education stresses that Interrelated social structures that fit together to form an
man exist through the other and for others for he integrated whole
becomes actuated through relations Structural functionalism
a. Existential Dialogue c. Socialization Conflict theory
b. Personalization d. Vigilance Symbolic Interactionism
30 To what particular concept must education be Disruptive Functionalism
based according to contemporary philosophy? Development of self and adaptation of individual to
Existential dialogue society
Social Change Structural functionalism
Supremacy of the human person Conflict theory
Synergy Symbolic Interactionism
This emerging social value in education stresses the Disruptive Functionism
importance if the we-experience ad the Which is NOT a method in sociological inquiry
converging of the worlds a. Experimental study c. Intuitive study
a. Authentic being c. Personalization b. Longitudinal Study d. Ex-post Facto
b. Existential dialogue d. Synergy study
32 The essentialist would likely have this as the Which of the following give some difficulties to a
ultimate aim of education sociological researcher?
To fit man to perform, justly, skillfully and Complexity of phenomena
magnanimous in all times in peace and war Constant change
To develop the power of thought. To search for an Unpredictability of behavior
disseminate the truth All of the above
To give all pupils insight into their traditions A cluster of behavior patterns related to the general
To meet the needs of the growing child culture of a society and yet distinguishable from it
The philosophical belief that reality is precisely what as a. Sub-culture c. Norm
it appear to be and adheres to the belief b. Culture shock d. mores
that seeing is believing Which group would most likely have a counter culture?
a. Coherence c. Nave Realism a. Musician c. Singers
b. Consistency d. Pragmatism b. Drugs users d. Dancers
34 It is belief that when an idea agrees with its object, 48 The complex whole which includes knowledge,
it is proof of its truth. However, it is definition of beliefs, arts moral, laws, customs and other
truth not a criteria capabilities and habits acquired by man as a
a. Coherence c. Nave Realism member of the society
b. Consistency d. Correspondence a. Norm c. Culture
The belief that the ultimate criterion of truth is if an idea b. Folkways d. Mores
works then it is true When one consider the culture of another group as
a. Coherence c. Nave Realism inferior to his own, this connotes
b. Consistency d. Pragmatism a. Ethnocentrism c. Assimilation
b. Cultural relativism d. Acculturation
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 80
 50 The rightness or wrongness of what one does Which of the following statements is NOT true about
depend on where he is doing it Filipino families today?
a. Cultural integration c. Cultural relativism Male authority has declined
b. Cultural lag d. Cultural traits Division of labor has changed
51 The culture that includes undesirable behavior of Separation has become more common
the member of society. Formally condemned but Has cease to be socialization unit in society
widely practiced Which of the following is NOT an ethical issue that must
a. Real culture c. Sub-culture be confronted when doing social research?
b. Ideal culture d. Counter culture Are the subjects being paid enough?
The process by which a member learns the norms of the What degree of risk, pain or harm is involved?
group To what extent are the subjects being deceived?
a. Accommodation c. Compartmentalization Will there be disclosure of confidential or personally
b. Aggregation d. Socialization harmful information?
A role or status assigned according to heredity traits In most instances of participant observation the
without regard to individual preference, ability or researchers:
performance Hide their true identity
a. Achieved c. Attached Do not hide their true identity
b. Ascribed d. Applied Pay their informants for information
54 An achieved position in a society Acts as therapist to the subject
a. Heir to the throne c. Movie actor A research technique in which the investigators enter to
b. Presidential son d. First lady the activities of the group at the same time they
Refers to the difficulty people have in meeting their role study the groups behavior is
obligations Participants observation
a. Role conflict c. Role strain A semi-structured (open-ended) Interview
b. Role set d. Role ambiguity A structured interview
When a supervisor is tasked to report unsatisfactory A data discussion
performance of her co-workers who are also her Participant observation:
friends. She may experience A research tool used to follow-up on expected
a. Role play c. Role strain findings
b. Role conflict d. Role ambiguity A research interview in which the investigators ash a
57 Social control imposed on social deviants to list of questions, but is free to vary them or
maintain make up new ones that become important
a. Social stigma c. Social order during the course of the interview
b. Social strata d. Social mobility A research technique in which the investigators
Which of the following is NOT true? enter into activities of the group at the same
The deviant behavior of one generation may time they study the groups behavior
become the norm of the next A research interview determined entirely in advance
All forms of deviant are bad and followed rigidly
Deviant behavior is one way of adapting a culture to A research interview determined entirely in advance and
a social change followed rigidly is:
Some deviation are due to the failure of the Participants observation
socialization process to integrate the cultural A semi structured (open-ended) interview
norms into individuals personality A structured interview
A teenager in a good neighborhood of stable families A data discussion
and conventional people who rejects A research interview in which the investigators ask
middle class norms and become a delinquent is an list of questions, but is free to vary them or make up
example of new ones that become important during the course
a. Individual deviation c. Counter deviation interview, that is
Group deviation d. Relative deviation Participant observation
60 A case of compulsive drug addict is an example if a A semi structured (open-ended) interview
a. Primary deviant c. Tertiary deviant Structured interview
b. Secondary deviant d. All of the above A data discussion
Which is NOT a characteristic of a social group? A conversation between two or more individuals in
Physical collection of people which one party attempts to gain information from
Shares a common purpose and conscious of each others(s) by asking of questions is known as;
other A survey c. Participant observation
Share some common characteristics b. An interview d. Hypothesis testing
Member interact with one another 72 Sociological and anthropological be misused
Which is NOT a characteristic of the relationship among because it:
members of a primary group? Is hard to understand
a. Personal c. Segmental Is often used selectively by groups or individuals to
b. Informal d. Sentimental support certain motives
63 Which is an example of members if a primary Is often ambiguous
group? Has few applicants
a. Peer group c. School A survey by their nature usually
administration Are cross-sectional
b. Family d. Neighbors Are longitudinal
Involve secondary methodology
Involve participants observation
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 81
A cross-sectional study is If apes can be taught to use language, it denies the views
A research technique in which investigators enter that:
into activities of the group at the same time Only human can think
they study the groups behavior Only human have culture
Research examines a population at a given point in a Apes do not have history to pass on
time Apes are stupid
Research which examines a population, or portion Which of the following statements about culture is not
thereof, is questioned in order to reveal specific true?
facts about itself Every social group must have a culture on its own in
Research that investigates a population at several order to function
intervals over relatively a long period of time Every individual participates in a number of
Research that investigates a population at several different culture
intervals over a relatively long period of time is Meeting the social expectation of several cultures is
called often source of tree
a. A cross-sectional study c. Secondary Families do not have their own culture but instead
Analysis reflect the culture of the larger society
b. A residual analysis d. Longitudinal Promised to make this country great again. Ruled for
research about twenty years
Survey are used when: a. Diosdado Macapagal c. Ramon Magsaysay
Other measure do not produce statistical b. Ferdinand Marcos d. Carlos Garcia
significance The form of government established by Aguinaldo was
The findings of the study must be repeatable change from dictatorial to:
It is desirable to discover he contribution and a. Democratic c. Republic
interrelations of certain variables among large b. Sociologist d. Revolutionary
number of people Which provides he Tagalog shall be the official language
Procedures having cross-cultural applications of the republic?
needed a. Constitution of 1935 c. Biyak na Bato
A research method is which a population, or portion b. Makabula d. Malolos
thereof, is questioned in order to reveal specific Which of the following were the greatest naval battles in
facts itself is known as: history during Japanese occupation of the
a. A survey c. Experiments Philippines?
b. Participant observation d. Residual analysis a. Battle of Leyte gulf c. Claveri
78 Which of the following is NOT one of the three main b. Surigao Strait d. Dela Torre
methods of research used by sociologists? 91 The most cultured of the reformist, wrote a socio-
a. A survey c. Experiments historical novel based on facts he gathered in the
b. Participants observation d. Residual analysis Philippines
A statistical technique to make all significant groups in as a. Marcelo H. Del Pilar c. Mariano Ponce
society represented in a sample proportion to their b. Jose Rizal d. Jose Ma.
numbers in the large society is known as: Paganiban
Random sampling The editor of La Solaridad and a great orator, he initiated
A stratified random sample the reform movement
Sampling a. Marcelo H. Del Pilar c. Emilio Jacinto
Randomized response b. Jose Rizal d. Graciano Lopez-
The goal in designing a research project should be: Jaena
To prove a point 93 The generation of the spirits was common among
To provide a collection for all necessary and ancient Filipinos. Memories of their dead relatives
sufficient data to test the stated hypothesis were kept alive through craved idol. This practice
To selectively isolate the variables in order to prove was called
the hypotheses are either correct or incorrect a. Cult of the dead c. Nature Worship
To prove hypothesis false. If they cannot proven Mass of the dead d. Divination
false, they must be true The practice of having surnames was started during
An independent variable is Spanish regime through the order of
A testable statements about the relationship a. Gov. Gen Jaudenes c. Gov. Gen Claveria
between two or more empirical variables b. Gov. Gen Dela Torre d. Gov. Gen Polavejia
Anything that can be change As promised by Gen. Mc Arthur- he would return to
A variable that changes for reason that have nothing liberate the Filipinos after he could train troops, in
to do with another variable Australia. The Leyte landing signified the liberation
A variable that changes in response to changes in of the Philippines, was well as the return of the
another variable commonwealth government. Who was the
Which of the following is not a sign? commonwealth president who came with Mc
a. A clenched first c. A flag Arthur?
b. A knock on the door d. Yawning a. Romulo c. Osmea
83 The most important symbols are b. Roxas d. Quezon
a. Action c. Actions 96 Men and women of pre-colonial times had
b. Words d. Behavior weakness for personal adornment. A side from
84 The principal means through which culture is jewels, tattooing of the body was common. In the
transmitted from generation to generation is Visayas tattooed men were called
a. Actions c. Language a. Umalohokan c. Abi
b. Diffusion d. Behaviors b. Pintados d. Plista
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 82
Memories of brutality which was so in human during the 42 a 92 d
Japanese regime were always associated with a 43 c 93 a
particular Japanese group called 44 c 94 c
a. Kalibapi c. Kamikaze 45 d 95 d
b. Kempetai d. Samurai 46 c 96 a
Membership in the Katipunan come in grades: first
47 b 97 b
(katipons); second (kawal); and third (bayani). Each 48 c 98 b
grade designed as well as password so they could
maintain their secrecy of the movement. The 49 a 99 b
password for the kawal grade was? 50 c 100 a
a. Rizal c. Kawal
b. Gomburza d. Sundalo
99 Pre-colonial trade in the Philippines was
prosperous. Business transactions made use of:
a. Money system c. Credit system
b. Barter system d. Banking System
100 The use of magic charms was very common among
pre-Spanish Filipinos. One of these is the anting-
anting or agimat which is meant to:
Insure a man against a weapon of every kind
Made a man lovable to all ladies
Made a man invisible
Made him walk in storm or sea without getting wet
****THEEND*****

WORK HARD, DREAM HARDER

Social science
1 C 51 a
2 A 52 d
3 B 53 b
4 B 54 c
5 C 55 c
6 B 56 b
7 D 57 c
8 A 58 b
9 A 59 a
10 C 60 a
11 D 61 a
12 C 62 c
13 A 63 c
14 A 64 d
15 B 65 a
16 C 66 a
17 D 67 a
18 A 68 c
19 A 69 c
20 C 70 b
21 C 71 b
22 B 72 b
23 C 73 c
24 B 74 b
25 d 75 d
26 b 76 c
27 d 77 a
28 a 78 d
29 c 79 b
30 c 80 b
31 d 81 c
32 a 82 c
33 c 83 d
34 c 84 d
35 d 85 b
36 a 86 d
37 b 87 b
38 a 88 d
39 d 89 a
40 c 90 a
41 b 91 b
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 83
POST TEST SOCIAL SCIENCES This philosophy believes that the schools should
originate policies and progress which would bring
L.E.T APRIL 2010 about reform of the social order
a. reconstructionism c. Existentialism
What branch of philosophy is closely related to b. Progressivism d. Perennialism
education because it is concerned with human This is the logical conclusion if we are to apply the
knowledge in general and the criteria of truth? philosophy of martin Buber to education
a. Metaphysics c. Epistemology Education will be characterize by imposition and
b. Logic d. Ethics rules
This is the philosophical study of the universe and Education will be characterize by mutual
everything in it unfolding of persons
a. Cosmology c. Metaphysics Education will be characterize by pretensions
b. Ethics d. Axiology Education will be characterize by self
103 What philosophy posits that a social teacher is a motivation
revered person, central to the educative process Man as an embodied spirit means
and therefore must be excellent mentally and Man is a body and soul
morally in personally conduct and conviction? Man is a rational animal
a. Realism c. Essentialism Man is a totally, unique core or center, source
b. Idealism d. Progressivism wellspring of initiative and meaning
What would the aim of a realist education likely be? Man is subjective
Contribute to the development of mind and self Man as an embodied sprit implies that education
Provide students with the knowledge he will should
need to survive in the natural world Develop the intellect / mind
Give students insights into their traditions and Develop mans individuality
adapting students to society Develop essential physical and intellectual skills
Meet the need of a growing child rather than Develop the total man
emphasize the subject matter human beings are living in a human world implies
This philosophy emphasizes the teaching of that
controversial issues to prepare students for a Education must help man give meaning to his
progressive structuring of the social order world of others
a. Progressivism c. Reconstructionism Education must develop skills to survive in this
b. Social traditionalism d. Social Experimentalism world
The philosophy whose criterion of truth is seeing is Education must be relevant to this world
believing Education must be in the context of societal
a. Essentialism c. Progressivism needs
b. Native realism d. Existentialism This philosophy contends that the intellectual
107 This is the systematic consistent explanation of all the faculty of man is higher that the physical faculties
facts of experience. Its technical term is reason which a. Idealism c. Existentialism
is considered as the best criterion of truth b. Realism d. Logical Positivism
a. Pragmatism c. Correspondence The philosophical study of the essence and nature of
b. Consistency d. Coherence man
This philosophy contends that truth is universal an Rational psychology
unchanging and therefore a good education is also Epistemology
universal and constant Philosophy of human person
a. Perennialism c. Existentialism Social Philosophy
b. Progressivism d. Essentialism The branch of philosophy that studies the morality of
Which philosophy has for its curriculum a body human acts
intellectual subject matter that are conceptual on a. Aesthetics c. Ethics
subject, essential for the realization of mental and b. Cosmology d. Theodicy
moral development? This is the philosophical study of human knowledge and
a. Realism c. Existentialism the criteria of truth
b. Idealism d. Pragmatism a. Axiology c. Logic
110 A branch of Philosophy that studies the morality of b. Epistemology d. Metaphysics
human action This contemporary philosophical theme in education
a. Epistemology c. Ethics contends that education must involve in its processes
b. Metaphysics d. Cosmology the total human being-his subjectivity, the rational,
111 The area of Philosophy that specifically deals with the material and the emotional aspect for man is a
the problem of human values unity and not a duality
a. criteriology c. Theodicy Genuine dialogue
b. Epistemology d. Axiology Man as a being in the world
112 The aim of this philosophy is to reduce statements Man as an embodied spirit
about education to empirical terms The socials and the inter human being
a. Reconstructionism c. Philosophical analysis This philosophy proclaims the spiritual nature and the
b. Existentialism d. Social traditionalism universe. It holds that the good, the true and the
The educational theory, in response to progressivism, beautiful are permanently part of the structure of
which concerns with the revival of effort in the an unchanging universe
direction of teaching the fundamental tools of a. Existentialism c. Materialism
learning as the most indispensable type of b. Idealism d. Realism
education
a. Essentialism c. Philosophical analysis
b. Perennialism d. Social traditionalism
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 84
This philosophy posits the know ability of the world and This educational philosophy encourages accumulation of
everything in its as they are in themselves and their knowledge and thinking and must apply criteria for
existence independent of human mind moral evaluation. Suggested
a. Existentialism c. Materialism methods are questioning and discussion, lecture
b. Idealism d. Realism and the project, whether done singly or in group
The central aim of education should be to develop the a. Existentialism c. Materialism
power of thought this would likely be the aim of b. Idealism d. Pragmatism
what educational practitioner? This theory views education as a recurring process based
a. Existentialism c. Progressivist on eternal truths; thus, the schools
b. Perennialist d. Reconstructivist curriculum should emphasize the recurrent themes
This educational theory is based on the philosophy of human life
grounded on experience and the interaction of the a. Perennialism c. Progressivism
person with his environment. It posits that b. Pragmatism d. Reconstructionism
education must use past experiences to direct The philosophical study of human mind a.
future experiences Axiology c. Metaphysics
a. Existentialism c. Realism b. Epistemology d. Rational psychology
b. Idealism d. progressivism The philosophical study of being, its nature and
This philosophy is a way of viewing and thinking about essence
life in the world so that priority is given into a. Axiology c. Metaphysics
individualism and subjectivity. It believes that b. Epistemology d. Rational
human beings are the creator of their own Psychology
experiences A sociologist would be most interested in studying
a. Existentialism c. Realism Artifacts of the fast civilization
b. Idealism d. Reconstruction Group behavior
This emerging social values in education stresses that man Psychological problems
exist through the other and for others for Economic institution
he becomes actuated through relations Interrelated social structures that fit together to
a. Existential Dialogue c. Socialization form an integrated whole
b. Personalization d. Vigilance Structural functionalism
To what particular concept must education be based Conflict theory
according to contemporary philosophy? Symbolic Interactionism
Existential dialogue Disruptive Functionalism
Social Change Development of self and adaptation of individual to
Supremacy of the human person society
Synergy Structural functionalism
This emerging social value in education stresses the Conflict theory
importance if the we-experience ad the Symbolic Interactionism
converging of the worlds Disruptive Functionism
a. Authentic being c. Personalization Which is NOT a method in sociological inquiry
b. Existential dialogue d. Synergy a. Experimental study c. Intuitive study
The essentialist would likely have this as the b. Longitudinal Study d. Ex-post Facto
ultimate aim of education study
To fit man to perform, justly, skillfully and Which of the following give some difficulties to a
magnanimous in all times in peace and war sociological researcher?
To develop the power of thought. To search for an Complexity of phenomena
disseminate the truth Constant change
To give all pupils insight into their traditions Unpredictability of behavior
To meet the needs of the growing child All of the above
The philosophical belief that reality is precisely A cluster of behavior patterns related to the general
what as it appear to be and adheres to the culture of a society and yet distinguishable from it
belief that seeing is believing a. Sub-culture c. Norm
a. Coherence c. Nave Realism b. Culture shock d. mores
b. Consistency d. Pragmatism Which group would most likely have a counter
It is belief that when an idea agrees with its object, it is culture?
proof of its truth. However, it is definition of truth a. Musician c. Singers
not a criteria b. Drugs users d. Dancers
a. Coherence c. Nave Realism The complex whole which includes knowledge,
b. Consistency d. Correspondence beliefs, arts moral, laws, customs and other
The belief that the ultimate criterion of truth is if an capabilities and habits acquired by man as a
idea works then it is true member of the society
a. Coherence c. Nave Realism a. Norm c. Culture
b. Consistency d. Pragmatism b. Folkways d. Mores
136 It is a systematic consistent explanation of all the facts 149 When one consider the culture of another group as
of experience. Its technical name is reason. This is inferior to his own, this connotes
believed to be the ultimate criterion of truth a. Ethnocentrism c. Assimilation
a. Coherence c. Nave Realism b. Cultural relativism d. Acculturation
b. Consistency d. Pragmatism 150 The rightness or wrongness of what one does
depend on where he is doing it
a. Cultural integration c. Cultural relativism
b. Cultural lag d. Cultural traits
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 85
The culture that includes undesirable behavior of the Which of the following is NOT an ethical issue that must
member of society. Formally condemned but be confronted when doing social research?
widely practiced Are the subjects being paid enough?
a. Real culture c. Sub-culture What degree of risk, pain or harm is involved?
b. Ideal culture d. Counter culture To what extent are the subjects being
The process by which a member learns the norms of deceived?
the group Will there be disclosure of confidential or
a. Accommodation c. Compartmentalization personally harmful information?
b. Aggregation d. Socialization In most instances of participant observation the
A role or status assigned according to heredity traits researchers:
without regard to individual preference, ability or Hide their true identity
performance Do not hide their true identity
a. Achieved c. Attached Pay their informants for information
b. Ascribed d. Applied Acts as therapist to the subject
154 An achieved position in a society A research technique in which the investigators enter to
a. Heir to the throne c. Movie actor the activities of the group at the same time they
b. Presidential son d. First lady study the groups behavior is
Refers to the difficulty people have in meeting their role Participants observation
obligations A semi-structured (open-ended) Interview
a. Role conflict c. Role strain A structured interview
b. Role set d. Role ambiguity A data discussion
When a supervisor is tasked to report unsatisfactory Participant observation:
performance of her co-workers who are also her A research tool used to follow-up on expected
friends. She may experience findings
a. Role play c. Role strain A research interview in which the investigators ash a
b. Role conflict d. Role ambiguity list of questions, but is free to vary them or make
157 Social control imposed on social deviants to up new ones that become important during the
maintain course of the interview
a. Social stigma c. Social order A research technique in which the investigators
b. Social strata d. Social mobility enter into activities of the group at the same
Which of the following is NOT true? time they study the groups behavior
The deviant behavior of one generation may A research interview determined entirely in
become the norm of the next advance and followed rigidly
All forms of deviant are bad A research interview determined entirely in
Deviant behavior is one way of adapting a advance and followed rigidly is:
culture to a social change Participants observation
Some deviation are due to the failure of the A semi structured (open-ended) interview
socialization process to integrate the cultural A structured interview
norms into individuals personality A data discussion
A teenager in a good neighborhood of stable A research interview in which the investigators ask
families and conventional people who rejects list of questions, but is free to vary them or make
middle class norms and become a delinquent is up new ones that become important during the
an example of course interview, that is
a. Individual deviation c. Counter deviation Participant observation
Group deviation d. Relative deviation A semi structured (open-ended) interview
160 A case of compulsive drug addict is an example if a Structured interview
a. Primary deviant c. Tertiary deviant A data discussion
b. Secondary deviant d. All of the above A conversation between two or more individuals in which
Which is NOT a characteristic of a social group? one party attempts to gain information from
Physical collection of people others(s) by asking of questions is known as;
Shares a common purpose and conscious of A survey c. Participant observation
each other b. An interview d. Hypothesis testing
Share some common characteristics Sociological and anthropological be misused
Member interact with one another because it:
Which is NOT a characteristic of the relationship Is hard to understand
among members of a primary group? Is often used selectively by groups or
a. Personal c. Segmental individuals to support certain motives
b. Informal d. Sentimental Is often ambiguous
Which is an example of members if a primary Has few applicants
group? A survey by their nature usually
a. Peer group c. School Are cross-sectional
administration Are longitudinal
b. Family d. Neighbors Involve secondary methodology
Which of the following statements is NOT true Involve participants observation
about Filipino families today?
Male authority has declined
Division of labor has changed
Separation has become more common
Has cease to be socialization unit in society
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 86
A cross-sectional study is If apes can be taught to use language, it denies the
A research technique in which investigators views that:
enter into activities of the group at the same Only human can think
time they study the groups behavior Only human have culture
Research examines a population at a given Apes do not have history to pass on
point in a time Apes are stupid
Research which examines a population, or Which of the following statements about culture is not
portion thereof, is questioned in order to true?
reveal specific facts about itself Every social group must have a culture on its
Research that investigates a population at several own in order to function
intervals over relatively a long period of time Every individual participates in a number of
Research that investigates a population at several different culture
intervals over a relatively long period of time is Meeting the social expectation of several
called cultures is often source of tree
a. A cross-sectional study c. Secondary Families do not have their own culture but instead
Analysis reflect the culture of the larger society
b. A residual analysis d. Longitudinal Promised to make this country great again. Ruled for
research about twenty years
Survey are used when: a. Diosdado Macapagal c. Ramon Magsaysay
Other measure do not produce statistical b. Ferdinand Marcos d. Carlos Garcia
significance The form of government established by Aguinaldo was
The findings of the study must be repeatable change from dictatorial to:
It is desirable to discover he contribution and a. Democratic c. Republic
interrelations of certain variables among large b. Sociologist d. Revolutionary
number of people Which provides he Tagalog shall be the official
Procedures having cross-cultural applications language of the republic?
needed a. Constitution of 1935 c. Biyak na Bato
A research method is which a population, or portion b. Makabula d. Malolos
thereof, is questioned in order to reveal specific Which of the following were the greatest naval battles
facts itself is known as: in history during Japanese occupation of the
a. A survey c. Experiments Philippines?
b. Participant observation d. Residual analysis a. Battle of Leyte gulf c. Claveri
178 Which of the following is NOT one of the three main b. Surigao Strait d. Dela Torre
methods of research used by sociologists? 191 The most cultured of the reformist, wrote a socio-
a. A survey c. Experiments historical novel based on facts he gathered in the
b. Participants observation d. Residual analysis Philippines
A statistical technique to make all significant groups in as a. Marcelo H. Del Pilar c. Mariano Ponce
society represented in a sample proportion to their b. Jose Rizal d. Jose Ma.
numbers in the large society is known as: Paganiban
Random sampling The editor of La Solaridad and a great orator, he
A stratified random sample initiated the reform movement
Sampling a. Marcelo H. Del Pilar c. Emilio Jacinto
Randomized response b. Jose Rizal d. Graciano Lopez-
The goal in designing a research project should be: Jaena
To prove a point 193 The generation of the spirits was common among
To provide a collection for all necessary and ancient Filipinos. Memories of their dead relatives
sufficient data to test the stated hypothesis were kept alive through craved idol. This practice
To selectively isolate the variables in order to was called
prove the hypotheses are either correct or a. Cult of the dead c. Nature Worship
incorrect Mass of the dead d. Divination
To prove hypothesis false. If they cannot The practice of having surnames was started during
proven false, they must be true Spanish regime through the order of
An independent variable is a. Gov. Gen Jaudenes c. Gov. Gen Claveria
A testable statements about the relationship b. Gov. Gen Dela Torre d. Gov. Gen Polavejia
between two or more empirical variables As promised by Gen. Mc Arthur- he would return to
Anything that can be change liberate the Filipinos after he could train troops, in
A variable that changes for reason that have Australia. The Leyte landing signified the liberation
nothing to do with another variable of the Philippines, was well as the return of the
A variable that changes in response to changes in commonwealth government. Who was the
another variable commonwealth president who came with Mc
Which of the following is not a sign? Arthur?
a. A clenched first c. A flag a. Romulo c. Osmea
b. A knock on the door d. Yawning b. Roxas d. Quezon
183 The most important symbols are Men and women of pre-colonial times had weakness
a. Action c. Actions for personal adornment. A side from jewels,
b. Words d. Behavior tattooing of the body was common. In the
The principal means through which culture is Visayas tattooed men were called
transmitted from generation to generation is a. Umalohokan c. Abi
a. Actions c. Language b. Pintados d. Plista
b. Diffusion d. Behaviors
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 87
Memories of brutality which was so in human during 42 a 92 d
the Japanese regime were always associated with a 43 c 93 a
particular Japanese group called 44 c 94 c
a. Kalibapi c. Kamikaze 45 d 95 d
b. Kempetai d. Samurai 46 c 96 a
Membership in the Katipunan come in grades: first
47 b 97 b
(katipons); second (kawal); and third (bayani). Each 48 c 98 b
grade designed as well as password so they could
maintain their secrecy of the movement. The 49 a 99 b
password for the kawal grade was? 50 c 100 a
a. Rizal c. Kawal
b. Gomburza d. Sundalo
Pre-colonial trade in the Philippines was prosperous.
Business transactions made use of:
a. Money system c. Credit system
b. Barter system d. Banking System
The use of magic charms was very common among
pre-Spanish Filipinos. One of these is the anting-
anting or agimat which is meant to:
Insure a man against a weapon of every kind
Made a man lovable to all ladies
Made a man invisible
Made him walk in storm or sea without getting
wet
*****THEEND*****

WORK HARD, DREAM HARDER

Social science
1 c 51 a
2 a 52 d
3 b 53 b
4 b 54 c
5 c 55 c
6 b 56 b
7 d 57 c
8 a 58 b
9 a 59 a
10 c 60 a
11 d 61 a
12 c 62 c
13 a 63 c
14 a 64 d
15 b 65 a
16 c 66 a
17 d 67 a
18 a 68 c
19 a 69 c
20 c 70 b
21 c 71 b
22 b 72 b
23 c 73 c
24 b 74 b
25 d 75 d
26 b 76 c
27 d 77 a
28 a 78 d
29 c 79 b
30 c 80 b
31 d 81 c
32 a 82 c
33 c 83 d
34 c 84 d
35 d 85 b
36 a 86 d
37 b 87 b
38 a 88 d
39 d 89 a
40 c 90 a
41 b 91 b
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 88
PRINCIPLES AND STRATEGIES OF TEACHING 14. It is control by enforcing obedience or orderly
POST-TEST SEPTEMBER 2010 conduct or training that corrects and strengthens?
a. Management c. Techniques
It has reference to what teachers do in planning, b. Discipline d. Strategies
implementing and evaluating instruction. When students are asked to respond to incomplete
a. Teaching c. Teaching strategies statements or questions that are presented in oral/
b. Curriculum d. Instruction written form
The orderly process directing learners to develop their Open-ended Statement
skills and habits so that they will be assisted in Close-procedure
acquiring knowledge and attitudes. PAC Strategy
Instructional Media Structured Activity
Instructional Method These are all the experience which children have
Teaching Techniques under the direction of a school
Instructional System a. Curriculum c. Learning
Facial Expression, writing on the board, and oral b. Instruction d. Socialization
expression of the teacher is an example of The subjects mater, not the child is important in this
Teaching Behavior type of curriculum
Technical Skills of teachers Correlated curriculum
Instruction Subject-centered curriculum
Instructional System Experience curriculum
Learning to draw, drive a car, play tennis, cook and type Fused curriculum
a poem often taught in is an example of The child-instead of the subject-matter is
a. Cognitive Learning c. Verbal Learning important in this kind of curriculum
b. Motor Skill Learning d. Social Learning Correlated curriculum
Responding to telephone calls, writing ones name, Core curriculum
reading a book orally is an example Experience curriculum
a. Cognitive Learning c. Verbal Learning Fused curriculum
b. Motor skill learning d. Serial Learning It is a unified curriculum where subject matters from
A process wherein the pupils attention and interest different subject field are treated unitary of the
are aroused and directed to a definite same curriculum
purpose. Core curriculum
a. Learning c. Method Integrated Curriculum
b. Motivation d. Principle Broad field curriculum
Contains a statement of results to be accomplished Fused curriculum
and specific means by which these results are to be Teachers initiative, imagination, puppet shows, play,
attained under direction and guidance. reading and animated cartoons can be examples
a. Method c. Technique of enriching the curriculum under these
b. Lesson Plan d. Principle resources
Could be the means of developing good study Specializing Resources
habits and independence in work as well as Creative Resources
preparing the pupils for the job to be done Human Resources
a. Review c. Assignment Reading Resources
b. Drill d. Recitation A curriculum considered basics for all students, that
The act of repeating from memory the reciting of a all must get them
lesson and often described as a session lesson Broad field curriculum
hearing Core curriculum
a. Review c. Assignment Integrated Curriculum
b. Recitation d. Drill Experience Curriculum
A teaching procedure dealing with first-hand The whole body of experience utilized by the
experiences pertaining to material obtained from school to attain the aims of education
experimentation a. Psychology c. Socialization
Demonstration Method b. Curriculum d. Methods
Laboratory Method Formal education starts when the child
Discovery Method begins to talk
Deductive Method reaches the age of six years old
Starts with generalization and principles or from first enters school
general to particular begins to be inquisitive
a. Inductive Method c. Classical Method That aspect of curriculum that has to do with the
b. Deductive Method d. Problem Method preservation of the best in our culture, customs
12. Students enact situations that arise in daily living, and traditions has been borrowed from
where values may be clarified, insights are a. Sociology c. Psychology
developed and decision-making is practiced b. Sociometry d. Ethics
a. Simulation Game c. Demonstration The curriculum must take into consideration the
b. Role Playing d. Inquiry Process aim of education
Encouraging students to search for and see learning process
relationships that are not obvious; also it stretches motives and incentives
the intellect of students instincts
Open-ended Questions The curriculum is
Recall Questions a. all-embracing c. all power
Explanatory Questions b. encompassing d. selective
Descriptive Question
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 89
27. In the traditional school, the focus of attention was 39. Teaching method which proceeds from the details
on the of a lesson towards the generalization is called:
a. child c. method a. Inductive c. problem-solving
b. subject matter d. book b. deductive d. debate
Curriculum objects are formulated in the light of our 40. A teaching method which proceeds from a
past history generalization, principle or rule is:
educational policy and philosophy a. inductive c. project
experience as a nation b. deductive d. process
needs in school 41. The recent approach in teaching Social Studies is
Which of the following questions encourages called
reflective thinking? a. discovery c. process
What are the parts of a complete flower? b. conceptual d. formal-education
What do we use to observe matter? A method of teaching which aptly applies to
In what ways can help his community lessons needing experiments is called:
Why are machine-made goods cheaper than a. problem-solving c. observation
those made by hands? b. laboratory d. demonstration
The success of the pupils in formulating What type of lesson is presented wherein the learner
generalization greatly depends on: meets the learning experience through
the interest of the pupils understanding, analysis, and generalizations of
the devices used facts presented?
the subjects matter a. review c. developmental
the teachers skillful questioning b. drill d. deductive
In the inquiry method, the initiation phase calls for the What lesson is presented when the teacher takes up the
teacher to set the stage for: previous learning experiences of the learners in a
finding solutions to problem recognized pattern of presentation?
raising of problems Drill
gathering data developmental
formulating generalization review
Method is dependent upon: discussion procedure
classroom techniques A lesson which aims to focalize skills to make them
teachers expectation fixed to the point of mastery is
theoretical assumptions a. problem-type c. review
available textbooks b. drill d. experimental
To lead the students to the desired behavior, 46. The law of exercise is aptly applied in a
method must be implemented through: a. review lesson c. drill lesson
selected technique b. assignment d. check-up
the curriculum A type of review which presents the sum-total of all
the discussion of the teacher activities previously presented
careful observation a. integrated c. daily
Which is not true regarding the project method? b. cumulative d. drill
Many worthwhile projects are impossible 48. What recent technique o teaching calls for acting
because of the materials needed out of a situation where the participants aim to
The project method should be used uncover a problem of great importance to the
occasionally but not regularly class?
The pupil or the class should carry the chief a. panel c. role-playing
responsibility of planning the project b. debate-form d. lecture-form
The project method is adaptable to all units in the What technique of in-service training for teachers
curriculum involves the identification and solution of common
The laboratory method is also called: problems by them, thru live-in sessions,
the research methods conferences, and speeches of consultants?
the deductive method a. buzz session c. seminar
the development method b. workshop d. professional meeting
the problem method The non-verbal symbols used to maximize learning are
In the unit method, actual learning takes place in: referred to as
orienting the pupils Instructional devices
collecting, discovering and recording data Classrooms techniques
summarizing the unit Field trips
organizing the unit or study Educational media
A statement of objectives, learning experience and Graphic material which are eye-catching and which use
the means of attaining results of teaching is called slogans and topics presented in bold letterings
a. procedure c. outcomes and strong colors to serve as reminders of
b. lesson plan d. strategy standards and / or important events are called
Teaching aids which the teacher uses to make learning a. poster c. projector
meaningful, productive and interesting is known b. film strips d. objects
as: 52. What contemporary aid to teaching utilizes
device carefully-planned materials where each step of
technique learning requires repetition and practice until such
method step is thoroughly learned?
learning continuum programmed instruction
Keypunching
Educational Television
Educational hardware
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 90
The Stimulus-Response theory of learning which What teaching method helps the learners draw
involves the association between a conditioned generalization from a discipline with the end in
stimulus and a response thru the repeated view of applying the same similar situations in
presentation of the stimulus was advocated by the future?
whom? discovery approach
a. Edward Thorndike c. Burrhus Skinner process approach
b. Ivan Pavlov d. Wolfgang Kohler conceptual approach
What plan of promoting pupils is committed to problem-solving approach
encouraging the learners to progress from grade to Which subjects is in the elementary and secondary
grade without needless repetition school levels mostly concerned with the study of
non-graded scheme societal problems and issues which are significant
individualized to the learners as member of society?
heterogeneous grouping Modern Mathematics
acceleration Social Studies
Differentiated assignments, tutorial and remedial work Filipino
to would-be-failures are not considered in Character Education
the individualized Instruction Scheme Which of these are considered with two essential
a. Yes c. Maybe dimension of science teaching?
b. No d. Sometimes observing and inferring
A part of a daily lesson which serves as a carry-over for seeing and observing
the next day of what has been presented is the reading and researching
review knowledge and performance
drill Which of these is not a process in science
assignment or agreement teaching?
lesson proper Measurement
A good learning environment is one Communication skill
a. free from distraction c. disturbing noise Controlling variables
b. aver decorated d. dilapidated None of these
The proper handling of the physical condition ad Of the process involve in the modern approach to science
instructional materials in the classroom to effect instruction, which one utilizes the most
learning refers to number of scientific processes.
teaching method a. prediction c. inference
Classroom management b. experimentation d. hypothesis
Discipline grouping Give the main difference of these two objectives:
Guidance-oriented to teach the importance of proper nutrition
What refers to the process o directing immediate for good health
personal desires, interests or wishes for the to give the importance of proper nutrition for
purpose of achieving an effective action? good health
a. discipline c. supervision
b. teaching d. management 0 The first objective is general while the second
What characteristics an effective type of is specific.
discipline?
vital, sympathetic, humane I The first objective is hard to do while the
formal and strict second is easy
inhibited
imposed II The first objective needs a longer time while
Which of these is not a quality of a good teacher? the second doesnt
mastery o the subject matter
broad background of liberal education
III The first objective is teacher
behavior while the second pupil behavior.
aims to enrich himself thru teaching
understand the nature of the learners Which of the objectives below show overt
behavior?
Which of these is a good personal qualification of a
teacher?
resourceful, creative and intelligent
0 To appreciate the value of democracy.
rich, capricious and luxurious
complaining, demanding and scornful
I To understand the importance of a
constitution
materialistic
Which of these is included among the professional
ethics o school teachers?
II To recite he preamble of the constitution
professional jealousy
integrity
III To show love to ones country
The basis by which content is outlined and
engaging in business pre-judicial to his institutional procedures are developed is the:
teaching duties
a. lesson plan c. objectives
gossip mongering
b. basic text d. instructional materials
An objective MUST specify:
What the learner must do or say.
What the teacher must do or say
What projects are to be accomplished
What the learner must understand
Given ten photographs of biological cells, the pupils will
be able to identify six of them as plant or animal
cells. The underlined phrase is a :
terminal behavior
standard or acceptable performance
condition for learning an accomplishment to be realized.
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 91
74. To make statement as an objective in an English Which of the following statements is correct?
Lesson that is: Method is probably more important in college
a. specific c. correct than in the elementary
b. vague d. none of the above Method is more important in the elementary
What is the most fitting condition of learning for this than in high school or college
behavior: to conclude that plants need sunlight Method is more important in college than in
in order to live? high school
with the must of materials Method is less important than a lesson plan
given a set of pictures What encourages the child to think, rationalize and
after reading the book make proper decisions?
realistic drill
Which of the following is not a criterion of a well- Appreciation lesson
formulated objective? Memorization
a. attainable c. interesting Problem- oriented strategies
b. observable d. realistic The following except one are the factors that
77. Which task below is not in the psychomotor determine the choice of a method. Which is the
domain? exception?
a. imitation c. manipulation nature o the learners
b. evaluation d. articulation school equipment and facilities
The growth of attitudes or values is in the: educational background of the teacher
cognitive domain Subject matter
psychomotor domain How well a teacher tells a story depends on:
affective domain a. Techniques c. the method used
behavioral domain b. the plot d. classroom
The domains of behavior do not come in isolation. This Which of the following statements is correct?
statements is : Method is synonymous with technique
a. True c. False A device is a teaching method
b. Acceptable d. Partly true Method can be standardized
Will a person do it freely without any type of There is no single best method
coercion? This is: When a teacher reviews a lesson, she is utilizing
a cognitive question the law of:
an affective question a. Readiness c. effect
a psychomotor question b. exercise d. multiple response
a behavioral question In which situation is the law of readiness best
To develop appreciation of poetry is a : applied?
a. general aim c. nature aim The teacher gives the aims of the lessons to be
b. specific aim d. serious aim taken up
Which aim below does not belong to the group? The teacher announces he subject matter at the
To enumerate the uses of common garden start of the period
tools The teacher waits or the children to be ready
To express opinion politely before teaching her lesson
To explain the significance of the story The teacher presents a song, related to the
To identify the parts of a flower. lesson
Which objective below is not realistic? Which of the glowing is not an am in the inductive
To respect places of worship method
To sing the national anthem correctly To delay judgments until truth is given
To give the importance of cleanliness To enable pupils discover important truths for
To cite ways to show love ones country themselves.
Which objective below is not specific? To help student/pupil to carry out an
To describe some of farming procedures investigation by themselves independent of
To define terms comprehensively the teacher
To pay tax promptly To make relationship of ideas clear to pupils
To know the life cycle of a moth. In the inductive method, what does the child do during
What phrase below is a standard of performance? the comparison and abstraction step?
Solve the problem correctly within 10 minutes Recalls information and directs himself to the
Identify and sketch the curve activities to be accomplished
With the use of a ruler Perceives the common element present in the
After several examples cases given
A visible activity shows : Applies the principles learned to other
overt behavior problems or exercises
covert behavior Draw conclusion in his own words
confident behavior The deductive method uses the following steps:
artificial behavior statement of the problem, generalization,
Which infinite below is not behavioral? inference, verification
a. to describe c. to compare statement of the problem, inference ,
b. to select d. To believe generalization, verification
Which objective below needs improvement inference, statement of the problem,
To prepare a seed box generalization, verification
To develop skill in embroidery inference, statement of the problem,
To plan a noon meal verification, generalization
To make an apron
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 92
In reality, the type of study method is:
an inductive procedure
a deductive procedure
a traditional method
a question and answer method
The Herbartian formal steps corresponds to the
steps of:
the inductive method
teaching an appropriate lesson
the deductive method
the project method

A thing becomes wasted when you fail to take

advantage of it

Principle and strategies

1 c 51 a
2 b 52 a
3 a 53 b
4 b 54 a
5 c 55 c
6 b 56 a
7 b 57 a
8 c 58 b
9 b 59 c
10 b 60 c
11 b 61 a
12 b 62 a
13 a 63 b
14 b 64 b
15 a 65 b
16 a 66 a
17 b 67 d
18 c 68 b
19 b 69 d
20 b 70 c
21 b 71 c
22 b 72 a
23 c 73 c
24 a 74 b
25 b 75 d
26 a 76 d
27 b 77 b
28 b 78 c
29 d 79 a
30 d 80 b
31 b 81 a
32 c 82 b
33 a 83 a
34 d 84 d
35 a 85 a
36 b 86 a
37 b 87 d
38 a 88 b
39 a 89 b
40 b 90 d
41 a 91 c
42 b 92 a
43 c 93 d
44 c 94 b
45 c 95 d
46 b 96 a
47 b 97 b
48 c 98 a
49 a 99 a
50 b 100 a
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 93
PROFESSIONAL EDUCATION
Pre-board EXAM
April 2010
MULTIPLE CHOICE
You are very much interested in a quality professional
development program for teachers. What
characteristic should you look for?
0 Prescribe by top educational teachers
I Dependent on the availability of funds
II Required for renewal of professional license
III Responsive to identified teachers
needs.
To ensure high standards of teachers personal and
professional development, which of the following
measures must be implemented?
A school head plans the professional
development of his/her teachers.
Every teacher formulates his/her own
professional development plan
The implementation of what is leaned in a
training must be
monitored. a. I only II and III
I and III d. II only
As a community leader, which of the following
should a teacher NOT do?
Support effort of the community to improve
their status in life.
Make herself aloof to ensure that her decisions will
not be influenced bu the community politics.
Solicit donation from philanthropists in the
community.
Play an active part in the activities of the
community.
In a highly pluralistic society, what type of learning
environment is the responsibility of the teacher?
I. Safe
II. Gender-biased
III. Secure
a. I and II c. II only
b. I, II and III d. I and III
A teacher is said to be trustee of the cultural and
educational heritage of the nation and is under
obligation to transmit to learners such heritage.
Which practice makes the teacher fulfill
such obligation?
Use interactive teaching strategies.
Use the latest educational technology.
Observe continuing professional education
As a class, study the life of Filipino heroes.
Which actions show that political factors affect
schools as agents of change?
The strengthening of the teaching of English in
Philippines school.
The introduction of mandated subjects such as Rizal
in the curriculum
The practice of mainstreaming
IV. The turnover of day care centers for DSWD to
DepEd for supervision.
a. I and III c. II and III
b. I and II d. II and IV
For more efficient and effective management of school
as agents of change, one proposal is for the DepEd
to cluster remote stand-alone schools under one
lead school head. Which factor has the strongest
influence on this proposal?
a. Psychological c. Geographical
b. Historical d. Social
What does the acronym EFA imply for schools?
The acceptance of exclusive schools for boys and
for girls.
The stress on the superiority of formal
education over that of alternative learning
system.
Practice of inclusive education
The concentration on formal education system
The wide acceptance of bottom up management
style has influenced schools to practice which
management practice?
Exclusion of politicians from the pool of guest
speakers during graduation exercises.
Prescription of what ought to be done from the
Center Office.
Involvement of students, parents, teachers, and
community in school planning
Allowing schools to do what they think is best
Large class size in congested cities is a common
problem in our public schools. Which measure/s
have schools taken to offset the effects of large
class?
0 The deployment of more teachers
I The implementation of 1:1 pupil textbook
ratio
II The conduct of morning and afternoon
sessions
a. I, II and III c. III only
b. I and II d. II only
The failure of independent study with most Filipino
students may be attributed to students
unpreparedness fro schooling
ambivalence
high degree of independence
high degree of independence on authority
The schooling incidents in school campuses abroad
have made school to rethink the curriculum. Which
is believed to counteract such incidents and so is
being introduced in schools?
0 Inclusion of socio-emotional teaching
I The emphasis on the concept of competition
against self and not against others
II Focus on academic achievement and
productivity
a. I and III c. I and II
b. II and III d. I, II and III
Widespread abuse of Mother Earth prompted
schools to teach sustainable development. which
one does this prove about schools?
The curricula of schools are centered on
Mother Earth.
Schools can easily integrate sustained
development in their curriculum.
Sustained development cannot be effectively
taught in the classroom.
Environment factors influence the school as an
agent of change.
A father tells his daughter You are a woman. You are
meant for the home and so for you, going to school
is not necessary. Is the father CORRECT?
It depends on the place when the daughter and the
father live.
Yes, women are meant to be a mother only.
No. today women can take on the jobs of men.
No, there is gender equality in education.
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 94
Is there a legal basis for increasing the teachers
starting salary to P18,000 an months?
No, it is a gift to teachers from Congress
Yes, R.A 7836
No, it is simply an act of benevolence from
President GMA
Yes, the Phil. Constitution
As provided for the Educational Act of 1982, how are
the institutions of learning encourage to set higher
standards of equality over the minimum standards
required for state recognition?
Granting of Special Permit
Academic freedom
Continuing Professional Education
Voluntary accreditation
Despite of opposition from some school official,
DepEd has continuously enforced the no collection of
fees policy during enrolment period in public schools.
In this policy in accordance with EFA goals?
No, it violates the mandate of equality
education
Yes, it somewhat eliminates gender disparities
Yes, it supports equitable access to basic
education
No. it does not support parent of adult
education
Specialization is knowing more and more about less
and less. Hence, it is better to be a generalist,
claims Teacher F. Which Philosophy does Teacher F.
subscribe to?
a. Existentialism c. Essentialism
b. Perennialism d. Progressivism
Mencius believed that all people are born good.
This thought on the innate goodness of people
makes it easier to our pupils.
a. teach c. like
b. Respect d. motivate
The specialization requires of every professional
teacher for him/her to be competent is in line with
which pillar of learning?
Learning to know
Learning to be
Learning to live together
Learning to do
Which pillar of learning is aimed at the wholistic
development of man and his complete fulfillment?
Learning to be
Learning to know
Learning to live together
Learning to do
Material development at the expense of human
development points to the need to do more in
school.
Learning to do
Learning to know
Learning to live together
Learning to be
A student complains to you about his failing grade.
When you recomputed you found out that you
committed an error in this grade computation. Your
decision is not accept the erroneous computation
before the student and so leave the failing grade as
is for fear that you may lose credibility. Is this
morally right?
No, the reason for not accepting the error
before the students in flimsy.
No, the end does not justify the means
Yes, the end justifies the means
Yes, as a teacher you must maintain your
credibility
Which violate(s) the principle of respect?
Teacher A tells her students that what Teacher B
taught is wrong.
To retaliate, Teacher B advises students not to
enroll in Teacher As class.
Teacher C secretly gives way to a special favor (e.g.
add 2 points to grade) requested by student A
who is vying for honors.
a. II and III c. I and II
b. I, II and III d. I and III
Which is/are in accordance with the principle of
pedagogical competence?
I. Communication of objectives of the course to
students
II. Awareness of alternative instruction strategies
Selection of appropriate methods of instruction
a. I and III c. III only
b. I, II and III d. II and III
With a death threat over his head, Teacher D is directed
to pass an undeserving student. Which will
utilitarianist do?
Pass the student, why suffer the threat?
Dont pass him; live by your principle of justice.
You will get reward, if not in this life, in the
next.
Pass the student. That will be of use to the
student, his parents and you.
Dont pass him. You surely will not like someone to
give you a death threat in other to pass.
Teacher A knows of the illegal activities of a neighbor
but keeps quiet in order not to be involved in any
investigation. Which foundational principle of
morality does Teacher A fail to apply?
The end does not justify the means
The end justifies the means
Always do what is right
Between two evils, do the lesser evil
To earn units for promotion, a teacher pays her fee but
does not attend class at all. Does this constitute
professional growth?
Not immediately but yes after promotion
It depends on the school she is enrolled in
No, it is simply earning MA units for promotion
Yes, just enrolling in an MA program is already
professional growth
If a teacher asks more higher-order questions, he has
to ask more questions.
a. fact c. convergent
b. close d. concept
Misdemeanor has a ripple effect. This implies that as a
classroom manager, a teacher
reinforces positive behavior
responds to misbehavior promptly
is consistent in her classroom management
practice
count 1 to 10 before she deals with a
misbehaving student
Based on Edgar Dales Cone of Experience, which
activity is farthest from the real thing?
a. Watching demo c. Video disc
Attending exhibit d. Viewing images
The students of Teacher Y scan an electronic
encyclopedia, view a film on subject, or look at
related topics at the touch of a button right there in
the classroom. Which device/s des teacher Ys class
have?
Teaching machines
CD
Video disc
Videotaped lesson
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 95
Which is an INAPPROPIATE way to manage off-task
behavior?
Redirect a childs attention to task and check his
progress to make sure he is continuing work
Make eye contact to communicate what you
wish to communicate
Move closer to the child to make him feel your
presence
Stop your class activity to correct a child who is no
longer on task
To be an effective classroom manager, a teacher must
be friendly but must at the same time be
. She reacts severely to a misbehaving student
a. confident c. analytical
b. businesslike d. buddy-buddy
Which software is needed when one wants to perform
automatic calculations on numerical data?
Database
Spreadsheet Program
Microsoft Word
Microsoft Powerpoint
Which of the following questions must be considered in
evaluating teacher-made materials?
In the material new?
Does the material simulate individualism?
Is the material expensive?
Kounin claims that with-it-ness is one of the
characteristics of an effective classroom manager.
What is one sign of with-it-ness?
Giving attention to students who are having
difficulty with school work
Seeing only a portion of the class but
intensively
Knowing where instructional materials are kept
Aware of whats happening in all parts of the
classroom
Which of these is one of the ways by which the
internet enables people to browse documents
connected by hypertext links?
URL
Browser
Welcome page
World Wide Web
Which characteristics must be primary considered as a
choice of instructional aids?
Stimulate and maintain students interests
Suited to the lesson objectives
Updated and relevant to Filipino setting
New and skillfully made
You can exhibit referent power on the first day of
school by
telling them the importance of good grades
giving your students a sense of belongingness and
acceptance
making them feel you know what you are
taking about
reminding your students your authority over
them again and again
I would like to use a model to emphasize particular part.
Which of these would be MOST appropriate?
a. Regalia c. Stimulation
Audio recording d. Mock up
What must a teacher do to ensure orderly
transitions between activities?
Allow time for the students to socialize in
between activities
Have the materials ready at the start of the
activity
Assign fewer exercise to fill the allotted time
Wait for students who lag behind
The task of setting up routine activities for effective
classroom management is a task that a teacher
should undertake
as soon as the students have adjusted to their
schedules
on the very first day of school
every day at the start of the session
every homeroom day
Teacher S uses the low-profile classroom control
technique most of the time. what does this imply?
She is reactive in her disciplinary orientation
She manages pupils personalities
She stops misbehaving without disrupting
lesson flow
When teacher tries to elicit clarification on a student
response or solicits additional information, which
of these should be use?
a. Directing c. Structuring
b. Probing d. Cross examining
Which priority criterion should guide a teacher in the
choice of instructional devices?
a. Novelty c. Attractiveness
b. Cost d. Appropriateness
Which learning activity is MOST appropriate if a
teachers focus is attitudinal change?
a. Fieldtrip c. Role play
b. Exhibit d. Game
Teacher H strives to draw participation of every student
into her classroom discussion. Which of these
student needs is she trying to address? The
need to .
0 shoe ones oral abilities to the rest of the class
I feel significant and be part of a group
II get everything and be part of a group
III be creative
Instead of teacher giving this comment a student
response. Youre on the wrong track!, what
should be teacher do?
0 Change the question to an easier one
I Redirect the question by calling another
student to recite
II Probe to redirect the response into a more
productive area
III Pause, ask the question, lecture,
then ask the question again
If curriculum is designed following the traditional
approach, which feature(s) apply(ies)?
I. The aims of the curriculum are set by
professionals and experts
Interested groups (teachers, students,
communities) are assumed to agree with
the aims of the curriculum
Consensus building in not necessary
a. III only c. I, II
b. I, II, III d. I, III
I want my student to develop the ability to look at a
problem from various perspectives. Which
approach will be MOST fit?
Behaviorist approach
Computer-based Education
Modular approach
Cognitive approach
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 96
Ones approach to teaching is influenced by Howard
Gardners MI Theory. What is he/she challenged to
do?
To come up with 9 different ways of approaching
lesson to cater to the 9 multiple intelligence
To develop all students skill in all nine
intelligences
To provide worthwhile activities that acknowledge
individual difference in children
a. I, II and III c. II only
b. II, III d. III only
If my approach to my lesson is behaviorist, what
features will dominate my lesson?
I. Copying notes III. Lecturing
II. Reasoning IV. Demonstration
a. III, IV c. I, II, III, IV
b. I, III, IV d. II, III, IV
54. You practice inclusive education. Which of these
applies to you?
You accept every student as full and valued
member of the class and school community
Your special attention is on learners with
specific learning or social needs
Your address the needs of the class as a whole
within the context of the learners with
specific learning or social needs
a. II only c. I only
b. I and II d. I and III
School curriculum reflects the worlds economic and
political integration and industrialization. What
does this point in curriculum development?
The trend towards the classical approach to
curriculum development
The trend toward the globalization and
localization
The trend toward participatory curriculum
development
The shift in the paradigm of curriculum
development from a process-oriented to a
product-oriented one
You choose cooperative learning as a teaching
approach. What thought is impressed on your
students?
Interaction is a must, but not necessarily face to-
face interaction
Students success depends on the success of the
group
Students individuality evaluate how effectively
their group worked.
The accountability for learning is on the group not
on the individual
What principle is violated by overusing the
chalkboard, as though it is the only
education technology available?
a. Isolated use c. Variety
b. Flexibility d. Uniformity
Which statement applies a CORRECTLY to Edgar
Dales Cone of Experience
The farther you are from the base, the more direct
the learning experience becomes.
The farther you are from the bottom, the more
direct the learning experience becomes.
The closer you are from the base, the more
indirect the learning experience becomes
The closer you are from the base, the more direct
the learning experience becomes
When more senses are stimulated, teaching and
learning become more effective. What is an
application of this principle?
Appeal to students sense of imagination
Use multisensory aids
Make your students touch the instructional
material
Use audiovisual aids because the eyes and the eras
are the most important senses in learning.
Which is a classroom application of the theory of
operant conditioning?
Help student see the connectedness of facts,
concepts, and principles
Create a classroom atmosphere that elicits
relaxation
Reinforce a good behavior to increase the
likelihood that the learner will repeat the
response
Make students learn by operating
manipulatives
Read the following teacher-student situation
TEACHER: Why is the process called
photosynthesis?
STUDENT: I dont know
Which questioning technique should be the
teacher use?
a. Clarification c. Prompting
b. Multiple response d. Concept review
62. Here is the test item.
From the data presented in the table, from
generalizations that are supported by the
data.
Under what type of question does this
item fall?
a. Convergent c. Application
b. Evaluative d. Divergent
I want to teach concepts, patterns and abstractions. Which
method will be MOST appropriate?
a. Discovery c. Direct instruction
b. Indirect instruction d. Problem solving
Teacher A teaches English as a Second Language. She
uses vocabulary cards, fill-in-the-blanks
sentences, dialogues, dictation and writing
exercises in teaching a lesson about grocery
shopping. Based on this information, which of the
following is a valid conclusion?
The teacher wants to make her teaching easier by
having les talk
The teacher emphasizing reading and writing
skills
The teacher is teaching in a variety of ways
because not all students learn in the same
manner
The teacher is applying Blooms hierarchy of
cognitive learning
Teacher A an experienced teacher, does daily
review of past lessons in order to
introduce a new lesson
reflect on how he presented the previous
lessons
provide his pupils with a sense of continuity
determine who among his pupils are studying
I combined several subject areas in order to focus on
a single concept for interdisciplinary teaching.
Which strategy did I use?
Reading-writing activity
Thematic introduction
Unit method
Problem-centered learning
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 97
To teach the democratic process to the pupils, Biag
Elementary School decided that the election of class
officers shall be patterned after local elections.
There are qualifications set for candidates, limited
period for campaign and rules for posting campaign
materials, etc. Which of the following did the school
use?
a. Symposium c. Pole playing
b. Simulation d. Philips 66
Which are effective methods in teaching student
critical reading skills?
Interpret editorial
Read and interpret three different movie
reviews
Read a position paper and deduce underlying
assumptions of the position papers
a. II and III c. I and II
b. I and III d. I, II and III
69. Here is a test item
The improvement of basic education should
be the top priority of the Philippine
government. Defend or refute this position.
Under what type of question does this
test item fall?
a. Low-level c. Analysis
b. Evaluative d. Convergent
When I teach, I often engage in brainstorming.
Which do I avoid?
Break down barriers
Increase creativity
Generate many ideas
Selectively involves pupils
Teacher S teaches a lesson in which students must
recognize that is the same 0.25. They use this
relationship to determine that 0.15 and 0.20 are
slightly less than . Which of the following
concept/s is/are being taught?
Numeration skills
Place value of decimals
Numeration skills of decimals and relationships
between fractions and decimals
Relationship between fraction and decimals
What is the best way to develop math concept?
Solving problems using multiple approaches
Solving problems by looking for correct answer
Learning math as applied to situations, such as
being a tool of science
solving problems by applying learned formulas
After the reading of a selection in the class, which of
these activities can enhance students creativity.
Readers theater
II. Reading aloud III.
Silent reading
a. I and II c. I only
b. II only d. III only
Teacher C, a Reading teacher, advised he class to
read between the lines. What does she want her
pupils to do?
Make an educated guess
Determine what is meant by what is stated
Apply the information read
Describe the characters in the story
To nurture students creativity, which activity
should a teacher AVOID?
Ask hat if questions
Ask divergent thinking questions
Emphasize the need to give right answers
Be open to out-of-this-world ideas
Teacher R wants to develop his students creativity.
Which type of questions will be MOST appropriate?
Synthesis questions
Fact questions
What if. questions
Analysis questions
In my attempt to develop creative thinking skills, I want
to test fluency of ideas. Which activity for my
students will be MOST appropriate?
Solve this math problem
List animals covered with hair in 1 minute
Solve this puzzle
Compare pictures 1 and 2. Where are the
differences?
You want your students to answer the questions at the
end of a reading lesson. What did I learn
did?,What still puzzle me?, What did I enjoy,
hate accomplish in the class today?,How did I
learn from the lesson?.Which of the following are
you asking them to do?
Work on an assignment
Make journal entry
Work on a drill
Apply what they learned
After reading an essay. Teacher B wants to help
sharpen her students ability to interpret. Which of
these activities will be most appropriate?
Drawing conclusions
Making inferences
Getting the main idea
Listing facts separately from opinion
Read the following then answer the question
A man and his son are driving in a car. The car crashes
into a tree, killing the father and seriously injury his
son. At the hospital, the boy needs to have surgery.
Looking at the boy, the doctor says
(telling the truth),I cannot operate on him. He is
my son. How can this be?
ASWER: The doctor is the boys mother.
The above brain twister helps develop
critical reading skills. Which activity was used?
0 Comparing
I Classifying
II Inferring meaning
III Looking for cause and effect
Research says that mastery experiences increase
confidence and willingness to try similar or more
challenging tasks as reading. What does this imply
for childrens reading performance?
0 Children who have not mastered the basic skills
are more likely to be motivated to read in order
to gain mastery over basic skills.
I Children who have mastered basic skills are more
likely to be less motivated to read because they
get fed up with too much reading.
II Children who have a high sense of self-
confidence are not necessarily those who can
read
III Children who have gained mastery
over basic skills are more motivated to read
The value that students put on reading is critical to
their success. In what way/s can teachers inculcate
his value for reading?
I. Sharing the excitement of read-aloud
Showing their passion for reading
Being rewarded to demonstrate the value of
reading
a. II and III c. I, II and III
b. I and II d. II only
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 98
Bruners theory on intellectual development moves Teacher H begins a lesson on tumbling, demonstrating
from enactive to iconic and symbolic stages. front and back somersaults in slow motion and
Applying Bruners theory. How would you teach? physically guiding his students through the correct

0 Be interactive in approach movements. As his students become more skillful,

he stands back from the man and gives verbal

I Begin with the abstract feedback about how to improve. With

Vygotskys theory in mind, what did Teacher H do?

II Begin with the concrete Apprenticeship

Guided participation

III do direct instruction Peer interaction

Scaffolding
A person who has painful experiences at the dentists What does Gagnes hierarchy theory propose for
office may become fearful at the mere sight of effective instruction?
the dentists office building. Which theory can Be concerned with the socio-emotional climate in
explain this? the classroom

0 Generalization Teach beginning with the concrete

Sequence instruction

I Operant Conditioning Reward good behavior

William Glassers control theory states that behavior in
II Attribution theory inspired by what satisfies a persons want at any
given time. What then must a teacher do to

III Classical conditioning motivate students to learn?

Make teaching-leaning interactive
Which is/are the basic assumption/s of Avoid giving assignments
behaviorists? Organize a curriculum in a spiral manner
I. The mind of newborn child is a blank state. Make schoolwork relevant to students basic
all behaviors are determined by environmental human needs.
events Soc exhibit fear response to freely roaming dogs but
The child has a certain degree of freedom not to does not show fear when a dog is on a leash or
allow himself to be shaped by his confined to a pen. Which conditioning process is
environment. illustrated?
a. III only c. II only a. extinction c. acquisition
b. I and II d. I and II b. generalization d. discrimination
If a student is encourage to develop himself to the fullest Based on Freuds theory, which operate/s when a student
and must satisfy his hierarchy of needs, the highest strikes a classmates at the height of anger?
needs to satisfy according to Maslow is a. Ego c. Id and Ego interact
. b. Id d. Superego
a. psychological need c. belongingness
Bernadette enjoyed the roller coaster when he and her
b. self-actualization d. safety needs family went to Enchanted Kingdom. The mere sight
In a Social studies class. Teacher I presents a morally of a roller coaster gets her excited. Which theory
ambiguous situation and asks student what they explains Bernadettes behavior?
would do. On whose theory is Teacher Is Operant conditioning
technique based? Social learning theory
a. Bandura c. Kohberg Attribution theory
b. Piaget d. Bruner Pavlovian conditioning
Teacher F is convinced that whatever a student performs a According to Frued, with which should one be concerned
desired behavior, provide reinforcement and soon the if he/she has to develop in the students
student learns to perform the behavior on his own. On correct sense of right and wrong?
which principle is Teacher I. Super-ego II. Ego III. Id
Fs conviction based? a. I and II c. I
a. Environmentalism c. Cognitivism b. II d. III
b. Behaviorism d. Constructivism When small children call animals dog, what
Banduras social learning theory, states that process is illustrated on Piagets cognitive
children often imitate those who development theory?
have substantial influence over their lives II. a. reversion c. accommodation
belong their peer group b. assimilation d. conservation
III. belong to other races 100. Researchers found that when a child is engaged in
IV. are successful and seem admired a learning experience a number of areas of the
a. IV only c. I and II brain are simultaneously activated. Which of the
b. I and IV d. II and IV following is/are implication/s of this research
According to Erikson, what years are critical for the finding?
development of self-confidence? Make use of field trips, guest speakers
High school years Do multicultural units of study
College years Stick to the left brain and right brain
Preschool years approach
Elementary school years a. I and III c. I and II
Which of the following does NOT describe the b. I only d. II only
development of children aged 11 to 13?
They exhibit increased objectivity in thinking
They shift from impulsivity to adaptive ability
Sex difference in IQ become more evident
They show abstract thinking and judgment
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 99
101. Which appropriate teaching practice flows from 108. With assessment of affective learning in
this research finding on the brain: The brains mind, which does NOT belong to the group?
emotional center is tied into its ability to learn. a. Cloze test c. Reflective writing
Establish the discipline of being judgmental in b. Moral dilemma d. Diary entry
attitude I want to test students synthesizing skills. Which has
Come up with highly competitive games where the highest diagnostic value?
winners will feel happy a. multiple choice test c. Essay test
Tell the students to participate in class activities b. Performance test d. Completion test
or else wont receive plus points in class 110.
recitation is an example of a leafy
Create a learning environment that encourages vegetable.
students to explore their feeling and ideas Why is this test item poor?
freely The test item does not pose a problem to the
102. Research on Piagetian tasks indicates that examinee
thinking becomes more logical and abstract as There are variety of possible correct answer
children reach the formal operations stage. What to this item
is an educational implication of this finding? the language used in the question is not
Engage children in analogical reasoning as early as precise
preschool to train them for higher order IV. The blank is near the beginning of a sentence
thinking skills (HOTS) I and III
Learners who are not capable of logical reasoning II and IV
from ages 8 to 11 lag behind in their cognitive I and IV
development I and II
Let children be children 111.
Expect hypothetical reasoning for learners What follows is a multiple choice type of
between 12 to 15 years of age 103. test.
Research says: People tend to attribute their Some test items .
successes to internal causes and their failures to are too difficult
external causes.Based on this finding, what should are objective
be taught to students for them to be genuinely are poorly constructed
motivated to succeed?
have multiple defensible answers
Tell them the research finding when applied will
make them genuinely motivated
Convince them that genuine motivation is the What makes the multiple choice type of test
only factor that matters for a person to poor?
succeed The options are not grammatically connected to
Make them realize that failure is a part of life the stem
Make them realize that both success and failure are The stem fails to present a problem
more a function of internal causes. There are grammatical clues
104. Which characterize/s a learning environment The options are not parallel
that promotes fairness among learners of various If a teacher wants to measure her students ability to
cultures, family background and gender? discriminate, which of these is an appropriate type
Inclusive of test item as implied by the direction?
Exclusive Outline the Chapter on The Cell.
Gender-sensitive Summarize the lesson yesterday.
a. I only c. I and III Group the following items according to
b. III only d. II and III shape.
105. Which of the following steps should be State a set of principle that can explain the
completed first in planning an achievement test? following events.
Define the instructional objective 113. A test item has a difficult index of 0.89 and a
Set up a table of specialization discrimination index of 0.44. What should the
Select the types of test items to use teacher do?
Decide on the length of the test Reject the item
106. The computed r fro scores in Math and Science Retain the item
in 0.92. What does this mean? Make it a bonus item
Math score is positive related to Science score Make it a bonus item and reject it
The higher the Math score, the lower the 114. Which form of assessment is consistent with the
Science score saying The proof of the pudding is in the eating.
Math score is not in any way related to Science a. Contrived c. Traditional
score b. Authentic d. Indirect
Science score is slightly related to math score 107. 115.
Which types of test is most appropriate if Teacher Y Who is best admired for outstanding
wants to measure students ability to organize contribution to world peace?
thoughts and ideas? a. Kissinger c. Kennedy
Short answer type of test b. Clinton d. Mother Teresa
Extended response essay
Modified alternative response What is WRONG with this item?
Limited response essay Item is overly specific
Content is trivial
Test item is option-based
There is a cue to the right answer
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 100
116. Students score were as follows: 82, 83, 84, 86, 88, 123. If the scores of your test follow a negatively
84, 83, 85. The score 86 is the. skewed score distribution, what should you do?
a. mode c. median Find out ?
b. average d. mean why your items were easy
117. Which text form would you choose if you want why most of the scores are high
to have a valid and reliable test based on the why most of the scores are low
table below? why some pupils scored high
Test Form Validity Index Reliability Index 124. Principal A is talking about grading on the curve
A .47 .68 in a faculty meeting. What does this expression
B .87 .57 refer to?
C .20 .86 A student mark compares his achievement to his
D .40 .41 effort.
E .63 .07 A students grade or mark depends on how his
achievement compares with the achievement
of other students in a class.
a. A only c. A and D
b. B only d. B and E A students grade determines whether or not a
student attains a defined standard of
118. A mathematicians test was given to all Grade V achievement
pupils to determine the contestants for the Math
Quiz Bee. Which statistical measure should be used A student mark tells how closely he is achieving to
his potential.
to identify the top 15?
Mean percentage score 125. Which tests determine whether students
Quartile Deviation accept responsibility for their own behavior or
pass on responsibility for their own behavior to
Percentile Rank
other people?
Percentage Score
Thematic tests
Nellies score is within x1 SD. To which of the
Sentence-completion tests
following groups does she belong?
Stylistic test
0 Below average Locus-of-control tests
126. Which of the one weakness of self-
I Average supporting personality checklists?
Many personality measures have built-in lie
II Needs Improvement scales
They lack stability
III Above average They may not get true information because
individuals can hide or disguise feelings
120. Use the inbox below to answer the question
that follows: They have poor internal consistency
Percentage Grades for Final Examination 127. Which of these can measure awareness of values?
Sociogram
Moral dilemmas
Projective techniques
Rating scales
40 70 80 90
128. Marking on a normative basis means that
100
the normal distribution curve should be
Which of the following statement is TRUE
followed
about the plot of grades above?
some should fall
The median is a score of 80 and the range is 60.
some get high marks
The median is a score of 70 and the range is 60.
the grading is based on a present criteria 129.
The median is a score of 80 and the range is 20. Which process enhances the comparability of
The median is a score of 70 and the range is 20. grades?
121. Which can be said of Arielle who obtained a score of Using a table specifications
75 out of 100 items in a Grammar objective test? Determining the level of difficulty of the tests
She performed better than 25% of her Giving more HOTS (higher order thinking skills)
classmates Constructing departmentalized examinations
She answered 75 items in the test correctly for each subject area.
Her rating is 75 SITUATIONAL
She answered 75% of the test items correctly 122.
The criterion of success in Teacher Ds objective is Situation 1- In a faculty meeting, the principle told
that the pupils must be able to spell 90% of the his teacher: We need to improve our school
words correctly. Ana and 24 others in the class performance in the National Achievement Test. What
spelled only 40 out of 50 words correctly while the should we do?
rest scored 45 and above. This means that Teacher The teacher gave varied answers as follows:
D 1. Lets give incentives and rewards to students
attained her lesson objective who get a rating of 85%
did not attain her lesson objective because of the Lets teach them to accept complete
pupils lack of attention responsibility for their performance
failed to attain her lesson objective as far as the 25
pupils are concerned Lets make the school environment
conducive for learning
attained her lesson objective because of her
effective spelling drill Lets make use of the experimental methods of
teaching
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 101
130. Which response/s come/s from a behaviorist? 139. On which assumption/s is the principals
a. #2 and #4 c. #3 and #4 action anchored?
b. #1 and #2 d. #1 and #3 Students learn by personally constructing
131. On which educational philosophy is response #1 meaning of what is taught.
anchored? Students are construct and reconstruct
a. Existentialism c. Progressivism meaning based on experiences
b. Essentialism d. Bahaviorism Students derive meaning from the meaning that
If you learned toward a progressivist philosophy, with the teacher gives
which response would you agree? a. II only c. I, II, and III
a. #2 b. #3 c. #4 d. #1 b. I and II d. I only
140. Which materials will her teachers LEAST prefers?
Controversial issues
Situation 2- One principle in the utilization of Open-ended topics
technology of the classroom is Unquestionable laws
appropriateness of material or activity. Problem or cases
141. Which concept/s of the learner will Principal E
133. Teacher C wants his students to master the NOT accept?
concept of social justice. Which series of activities Empty vesse!
will be most effective? Tabula rasa
Pretest-teaching-posttest Candle to be lighted
Pretest-teaching-posttest-re-teaching for a. III only c. II only
unlearned concepts-posttest b. I only d. I and II
Review-pretest-teaching-posttest
Teaching-posttest Situation 5- Study the matching type of test then
134. Teacher A likes to show how the launching of answer the 3 questions that follow:
spaceships takes place. Which of the following Column A Column B
materials available is most fit? 1. equilateral triangle A. With 3 equal sides
a. Model c. Replica 2. right triangle B. With 5 equal sides
b. Mock-up d. Realia 3. octagon C. Has 90- degree
135. Teacher B likes to concretize the abstract angle
concepts of an atom. She came up with a concrete 4. pentagon D. Means many
presentation of the atom by using wire and plastic
5. heptagon E. with 7 sides
balls. How would you classify Teacher Bs visual
aids? 6. poly F. with 8 sides
a. Chart c. Model
b. Replica d. Realia 142. How can you make the items homogeneous?
Increase the number of items in Column B
Situation 3- After reading and paraphrasing All items should be on polygons
Robert frosts Stopping by the Wood on a Remove the word triangle in items #1 and #2 in
snowy Evening. Mr. Sales asked the class column A
to share any insight derived from the poem. The word gon must be included in column B
143. What is the main defect of this matching test?
136. The class was asked to share their insights the matching type is an imperfect type
about the poem. The ability to come up with a n the items are NOT homogeneous
insight stems from the ability to the items quite easy
analyze the parts of a whole an obvious pattern is followed in the answering
evaluate the worthiness of a thing 144. Which should be done to improve the matching
relate and organize things and ideas type of test?
comprehend the subject that is being studied 137. To Capitalize the items in Column A
ask the class any insight derived from the poem Items in Column A and B should be exchanged
is based on the theory of Drop #6 item in Column A
a. realism c. conditioning The item in Column A should be increased
b. behaviorism d. constructivism
138. On which assumption about the learner is Mr. Situation 6- Below the template for Scoring
Marquezs act of asking the class to share their Rubric.
insight based?
Learners are like empty receptacles waiting to be 5-Demonstrate complete understanding of the
filled up problem. All requirements of task are included
Learners are meant to interact with one in response
another 4-Demonstrate considerable understanding
Learners have multiple intelligence and varied of the problem. All requirements of task are
learning styles included
Learners are producers of knowledge not only 3- Demonstrate partial understanding of the
passive recipients of information problem. Most requirements of task are included
2- Demonstrate little understanding of the
Situation 4- Principal E wants her teachers problem. Many requirements of task are missing
to apply constructivism in teaching 1- Demonstrate no understanding of the
problem
0-No response/task not attempted
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 102
145. Which of these is/are essential in constructing
a scoring rubric? 1 C 51 D 101 D
Description of criteria to serve as standard
2 B 52 B 102 D
Clear descriptions of performance at each level
3 C 53 B 103 C
III. Levels of achievement (mastery)
IV. Rating scheme 4 D 54 D 104 C
a. I, II, III c. I, II, III, IV 5 D 55 D 105 A
b. I, II d. I only 6 D 56 C 106 A
146. Which statement is TRUE of the rubric? 7 C 57 C 107 B
It is developmental
8 C 58 D 108 A
It is analytical
It is both holistic and developmental 9 C 59 B 109 B
It is holistic 10 A 60 C 110 D
147. Which is TRUE of the scoring rubric? 11 D 61 A 111 B
It describes criteria of levels of achievement
12 D 62 B 112 C
It has a rating scheme
It limit itself to 4 levels of achievement 13 B 63 A 113 B
I and II 14 D 64 D 114 B
I and III 15 D 65 C 115 D
II and III 16 C 66 B 116 D
I, II and III
17 C 67 B 117 A
Situation 7- Study the table on item 18 C 68 D 118 C
analysis for non-attractiveness and non- 19 A 69 C 119 D
plausibility of distracters based on the 20 A 70 D 120 A
results of a try-out test in Science. The
21 A 71 D 121 B
letter marked with a asterisk is the
correct answer. 22 A 72 C 122 C
23 B 73 C 123 B
Item No. 1 A B C D E 24 B 74 B 124 B
Upper 27% 10 4 1 1 0 25 B 75 C 125 D
Lower 27% 6 5 2 2 0
26 C 76 C 126 C
148. The table shows that the test item analyzed 27 C 77 B 127 B
. 28 C 78 C 128 D
has a positive discrimination index 29 D 79 B 129 D
has a negative discrimination index 30 B 80 D 130 B
is extremely easy
is extremely difficult 31 D 81 D 131 D
149. Based on the table, which is the most 32 A 82 C 132 B
effective distracter? 33 D 83 A 133 B
Option D 34 B 84 D 134 D
Option A
35 B 85 C 135 B
Option C
Option B 36 C 86 B 136 A
150. Based on the table, which group got more 37 D 87 C 137 D
correct answer? 38 A 88 D 138 B
Upper group 39 B 89 C 139 B
It cannot be determined
Lower group 40 C 90 D 140 C
Data are not sufficient to give an answer 41 D 91 C 141 A
42 B 92 B 142 B
43 C 93 C 143 B
44 A 94 D 144 C
45 B 95 D 145 C
When you get right down to the root of the meaning
of the word "succeed," you find that it simply means 46 D 96 B 146 C
to follow through. 47 C 97 A 147 A
48 B 98 C 148 D
49 B 99 D 149 D
50 B 100 C 150 C
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 103
GENERAL SCIENCE What is a eat haze?
A reflection caused by pollutants in the air
POST TEST A distorted image resulting from the bending o suns
Multiple Choices: light rays by changes in air temperature
A movement o warm air over a vast expanse of
These are living things that use sunlight, chlorophyll, land
water and carbon dioxide to produce Caused by extremely high temperature common in
food. dessert areas
a. Autotrophs c. Heterotrops What sort of rock formation do the worlds greatest
b. Consumers d. Food chain mountain ranges consist of?
2. It is describe as the lifeline of the body. IT is the a. Magma c. Fold eruptions
bodys pickup and delivery system. b. Chalk deposit d. Slip formation
a. Blood c. circulatory system 17. What is the fore that wears down mountains?
b. nervous system d. heart a. Earthquake c. Volcanic eruptions
It carries the oxygen-rich blood to the head, arms, b. Erosion d. Deforestation
chest and down to the waist and the legs. How are volcanic island formed?
a. heart c. aorta Collision of two oceanic plates
b. ventricles d. arteries Cooling of lava by seawater
4. They are the transmitters of message from the Volcanic eruptions
different parts of the body to the brain and vice Accumulation of corals
versa. When the Theory of plate Tectonics was generally
a. spinal cord c. brain accepted?
b. neurons or nerve cells d. arteries a. 1900s c. 1950s
5. Which part of the brain controls the following b. 1930s d. 1980s
activities: breathing, blood pressure, heart rate, The weathering away of rocks by water, wind and ice.
alertness. a. Denudation c. Volcanic rock
a. brainstem c. cerebrum b. Erosion d. Metamorphic rock
b. hypothalamus d. spinal cord How do hormones work?
6. Refers to a sequence of organism in a community By releasing adrenaline
that constitutes a feeding chain. By controlling cell chemistry
a. photosynthesis c. consumers By regulating water loss
b. ecosystem d. food chain By controlling blood pressure
Is a group of interacting plants, animals and human Name the male and female sex hormones
in a particular area. a. Sperm cell & Ovum c. Chromosomes
a. ecological community c. living organism b. Testosterone d. Red & white blood
b. environment d. food cells
chain 23. The unit of measurement of energy in a given an
Excessive presence of carbon dioxide in the air, mount of food
trapping heat near the earths surface causing a rise a. Pound c. Olfactory system
in temperature in the environment. b. Kilo d. calorie
a. El Nino c. Deforestation Nitrogen compounds known as the building blocks of
b. Greenhouse Effect d. Weather proteins
disturbance The growth of roots towards water is an example of?
The Earths shield against suns harmful radiation. a. Chemotropism c. Hydrotropism
a. Atmosphere c. Ozone layer b. Geotropism d. Phototropism
b. Air d. Forest 26. DNA means
The use of product containing ______ is a. Data nurturing analysis c. Deoxyribonucleic
discouraged because they contribute to the acid
depletion of_____. b. Deoxytribonucleic acid d. Deotrixyl nucleic
Chlorofluorocarbon-solar radiation acid
Gas-ozone layer What are the three products of oxygen when it has
Ozone layer air been burned?
Chlorofluorocarbon-ozone layer Water, carbon dioxide and air
What causes high and low tides? Energy, water and carbon dioxide
Earths rotation on its axis Energy, carbon and oxide
Moons gravitational pull Energy, air and water
Suns solar energy In flowering plants, fertilization happens in the?
Earths gravitational pull a. Pollen tube c. Ovules
How is coral a tool formed? b. Stamen d. Pollen grain
Volcanic eruption 29. The development of egg without fertilization
Corals growing around a volcanic island a. Mitosis c. Spermatogenesis
Underwater bedrock formations b. Parthenogenesis d. Mitochondria
Earthquake Which of the following is a source of energy needed for
What is a long shore drift? photosynthesis?
Movement o sand and shingles along the coast a. Water c. Light
Sand bars b. Soil d. Fertilizer
Accumulation o sad at the river mouth 31. Chemistry is primarily concerned with the
Island formed by volcanic eruptions composition and changes of?
How does an occlusion form? a. Nature c. Man
Cold air moving up from the ground b. Matter d. Earth
Cold front pushing warm air up of the ground
Unbalance electrical reaction in the air
Cold and warm air mixing in the atmosphere
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 104
A scientific theory is When a force is applied to a body, several effects are
A hypothesis not yet subjected to experimental possible. Which one of the following effect
test CANT occur?
An idea that correctly predict the result the body rotates
An imagination the body changes direction
A guess the body increase its mass
Which of the following units of measure is the body changes shape
equivalent to cubic centimeter? It is the reluctance of the object to change either
a. Milligram c. Millimeter its state of rest or uniform motion in a straight line
b. Milliliter d. Centiliter a. Force c. Inertia
34. Which of the following is NOT a compound? b. Friction d. Motion
a. acetic acid c. magnesium This law states that energy cannot be created nor
b. alcohol d. Zinc Oxide destroyed but only changes from one form to
The easier the atom to receive electrons is another
measured by its? Energy law
a. Elecrtonegativity c. Number of shells Kinetic Theory of Matter
b. Atomic radius d. Valence electrons Law of Conservation Energy
The willingness o an atom to receive electron is None of the above
measured by its? This law states that matter is made up of a large
a. Electronegativity c. Atomic size number of molecules which are in continuous
b. Ionization potential d. Electron affinity motion
A molecule is said to be polar or dipole if? Boyless Lawc. Law of Conservation Energy
Its positive and negative charges are at different b. Kinetic Theory d. None of the above
places The lowest possible temperature that a substance can
It possesses polar bonds reach
Its polar bond have unsymmetrical charge a. Freezing point c. Steam point
distribution b. Absolute Zero d. Threshold
All of the above It is the amount of heat required to raise the
Which of the following is NOT a physical property of temperature of kg. of a substance by degree C
water? a. Calorie c. Specific heat capacity
freezing point at 0 degree C b. Watt d. Joule
boiling point at 100 degrees C The relationship of give-and-take of living organism in
its heat of fusion at 80 cal/g. the biosphere is a balance of nature
its density at 4 degrees at 1 lb/cu. Ft called________.
Which of the following statements is true? universal relationship
Molecular weight does not influence boiling and symbiotic relationship
melting point of a substance spontaneous relationship
Boiling and melting point tend to increase with abiogenetic relationship
molecular weight Process of removing excess odor in water.
Boiling and melting point tend to decrease with a. sedimentation c. distillation
molecular weight b. chlorination d. aeration
None o the above Which of the following statement is CORRECT?
A Mole is the amount of substance or a mass of a As altitude increases, atmospheric pressures
substance that contains? corresponding
23
a. 6.02 x 10 particles c. 6.02 x 1023 Throughout the available space, gas tends to
particles contract
23
b. 60.2 x 10 particles d. 60.2x 1023 Equal chances are always given to all in life
particles Shadow is formed when a colored object is
41. It is the measure of the amount of matter in an projected against the wall
object The earth rotates on its axis from west to east. This
a. Weight c. Volume causes the sun to _______?
b. Mass d. Quantity appear with a fiery orange color
It is the distance traveled by the body per unit time and cause the appearance of solar eclipse
tell how fast or slow the body moves rise room the east and sets in the west
a. Velocity c. Acceleration emit solar radiation
b. Speed d. None of the above One of these planets has the greatest gravitational
The rate of change of the distance traveled per unit pull. Which one is it?
time in a stated direction a. Mars b. Earth c. Mercury d. Jupiter
a. Velocity c. Acceleration It is the law which explains why one can pull a piece
b. Speed d. None of the above without topping a glass in a quick motion.
This law states that the force acting upon an object is a. energy in motion c. law of inertia
equal to the product o the mass and acceleration b. gravity d. force
of the object 57. Which of the following is NOT a source of energy?
nd
Newtons 2 law of motion a. water c. geothermal heat
Newtons 3rd law of motion b. nuclear d. inertia at rest
st 58. Which instrument will one use to convert
Newtons 1 law of motion
None of the amount mechanical energy to electrical energy?
a. rotor b. generator c. motor d. circuit
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 105
Suns energy is generated by? 76. It is a segment of DNA molecule which controls the
nuclear fission appearance of a given trait
sun enacting with gravity a. Chromosomes c. Gametes
nuclear fusion reaction b. Genes d. Zygotes
reaction with magnetic field 77. Group of similar cells performing similar functions
Application of energy is called _______? together
a. work c. kinetics a. Organs b. System c. Nucleus d. Tissue
b. inertia d. simulation 78. The diffusion of water through a semi permeable
61. The falling of any form of water from the air to the membrane
earths surface a. osmosis c.
a. Condensation c. Water vapor Transfusion
b. Precipitation d. Rainwater b. permeability d. Capillary
The part of the atmosphere that filters the It shows the complex food relationship of organism in a
ultraviolet rays of the sun given area and the cyclic flow of food through
a. stratosphere c. Ozone layer organisms
b. Troposphere d. Ionosphere a. Food chain c. Food pyramid
63. The point in the earths orbit nearest to the sun b. Food web d. Biological cycle
a. Solstice c. Aphelion Which of the following does NOT occur to both
b. Eclipse d. Perihelion respiration and fermentation?
64. A property of minerals which gives off rays of light energy is released
when exposed to ultraviolet light. sugar is broken down
a. Luminescence c. Radiation carbon dioxide is produced
b. Phosphorescence d. Fluorescence alcohol is formed
Which process involves chemical weathering? Energy removal is best illustrated in
a. Carbonation c. Hydration boiling of liquid substances
b. Oxidation d. All of the above changing water to ice
66. How long does it take for the earth to complete one changing water to stem
rotation none of the above
a. 365 days c. 24 hours Refers to the maximum amount of solute expressed in
b. 30 days d. 12 hours grams that can be dissolved in 100
What is the principal function of gravity in the grams of water at a specific temperature
universe? a. Solubility c. Molarity
Provision for energy b. Stability d. Molality
Keeps the stars and other heavenly bodies in 83. Compounds with the same molecular formula but
orbit with different structural formulas
Causes movement in space a. Cellulose c. Polymers
Part of universal design b. Isomers d. Monomers
What does the word monsoon mean? 84. The most penetrating type of radiation given of by
a. Moon will soon come c. Seasons radioactive elements
b. Rains d. Wet a. Alpha particle c. Gamma particle
weather b. Beta particle d. None of the above
Its discovery enable geologist to date rocks The basic unit for expressing the masses o
accurately individual atoms
a. layering c. a. Atomic number c. Nucleus
Radioactivity b. Atomic mass unit d. Atomic weight
b. Evolutionary staging d. Carbon- A substance that speeds up a chemical reaction
dating without itself undergoing a chemical change
It occurs when the earth is between the sun and the moon, a. catalyst c. Electrolytes
with the earths shadow cast over the moon. b. Enhancer d. Ionizer
a. Total eclipse c. Eclipse 87. The temperature at which the vapor pressure of
b. Lunar eclipse d. Partial Eclipse the liquid is equal to the pressure of the
Male and female reproductive part of a flower surroundings atmosphere
Pollen grains and ovules c. Pollen grains and a. Melting point c. Boiling Point
pistil b. Critical point d. None of the above
Stamen and pistil d. Stamen and ovules the warming of the earths surface due to an
In the human body, the cell that most nearly increase in atmospheric carbon dioxide
resembles a one-celled animals a. Greenhouse effect c. Atmospheric
a. Red Blood cell c. Nerve cell pressure
b. White Blood cell d. Antibodies b. Ozone d. El Nino
73. The main energy source of a plant-eating animals a. phenomena
Glucose b. Starch c. Cellulose d. Glycogen 89. Describe the force of gravity on an object
These are cellular secretions which help regulate the a. mass c. capacity
breakdown and buildup of various substance in b. weight d. pressure
the body When gaseous molecules are compressed, they
a. Enzymes c. Plasma tend to?
b. Amino Acids d. Hormones increase in volume c. repel each other
75. It is the energy source of the cell which it uses for decrease in volume d.attract and liquefy
growing, reproducing and other activities It is the union of two light nucleus to form a heavier
a. Adenosine Triphosphate c. nucleus, resulting in a mass defect and release of
Chloroplast energy
b. Amino Acids d. Sunlight a. Radiation c. Nuclear Fusion
b. Nuclear Fission d. Radioactivity
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 106
Which of the following statements is a
characteristic of an electronic spectrum?
They all travel at the same speed in fire space
The exhibit diffraction and interference
phenomena
They follow the laws of refraction and reflection science and health
All of the above 1 a 51 b
The term RADAR is derived from the phrase? 2 c 52 d
Radiation Detection and Ranging 3 d 53 a
Radiation Diffusion and Ranging
4 b 54 c
Radio Diffraction and Resolution
5 a 55 d
Radiation Diffraction and Resolution
6 d 56 c
A material whose ability to conduct electricity lies
between those of conductors and insulators 7 a 57 d
a. Integrated Circuits c. Semiconductors 8 b 58 b
b. Silicon Chips d. Insulators 9 c 59 c
LASER is derived from the phrase? 10 d 60 a
Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of 11 b 61 b
Radiation 12 b 62 c
Light Application by Simulated Emission of 13 a 63 d
Radiation 14 b 64 b
Light Amplification by Simulated Ejection of 15 b 65 d
Radiation 16 c 66 c
None of the above
17 b 67 b
What is the color of a transparent substance?
18 a 68 c
The color of the light it absorbs
19 c 69 c
The color of light it reflects
The color of light it transmit 20 b 70 b
The color of light it refracts 21 b 71 b
What is a rotating electromagnetic called? 22 b 72 b
a. Motor b. Rotor c. Phasor d. Sensor 23 d 73 c
What happens with the centripetal force when sped is 24 d 74 d
doubled? 25 c 75 a
a. remains the same c. triples 26 c 76 b
b. force is increase 4x d. force is doubled 27 b 77 d
99. What is an electrochemical cell in which the 28 c 78 a
reacting materials can be renewed by the use o 29 b 79 b
reverse current
30 c 80 d
a. Storage cell c. Fuel cell
31 b 81 b
b. Primary cells d. Chemical cell
32 a 82 a
What will make an object move in a circular
path? 33 b 83 b
a. Central force c. Frictional force 34 c 84 c
b. Gravitational d. Electromagnetic 35 d 85 b
force 36 d 86 a
37 b 87 c
*****THEEND***** 38 b 88 a
39 b 89 b
WORK HARD, DREAM HARDER 40 c 90 a
41 b 91 c
42 b 92 d
43 c 93 a
44 a 94 c
45 c 95 a
46 d 96 c
47 b 97 b
48 b 98 d
49 b 99 a
50 c 100 a
St. Louis Review Center-Inc-Davao Tel. no. (082) 224-2515 107